OWNER’S MANUAL 2019 OWNER’S

2019 STELVIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GU-126-AB ROMEO STELVIO ALFA Second Edition Manual Owner’s VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact: Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada): P.O.Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, refer to "Fuel Requirements" in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material, as doing so is a fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment (if equipped).

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. Rollover Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

010301031 Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional equipment meant for specific markets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped. The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some vehicle components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

COMPONENT CAN START READ THE OWNER’S DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO MANUAL HANDS WHEN ENGINE IS OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016V0001EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Mirrors 2 — Engine Compartment 5 — Doors 3 — Windshield 6 — Wheels And Tires

11 REAR VIEW

03026V0001EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Liftgate

12 INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036V0001EM Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls 2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment 3 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On The Steering Wheel 8 — Information and Entertainment System

13 VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046V0001EM Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 4 — Gear Selector 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Drive Mode Selector 3 — Hazard Warning Lights

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 16 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 19 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 20 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 DOORS...... 23 SEATS...... 28 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 32 STEERING WHEEL ...... 34 MIRRORS ...... 36 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 37 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 40 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 43 HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 45 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 45 POWERWINDOWS...... 52 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .54 HOOD...... 55 POWER LIFTGATE ...... 56 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 61

15 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Unlocking The Doors And The Liftgate By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and liftgate, and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from the The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is Information and Entertainment System). you to lock or unlock the doors and immediately deactivated. liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from Push and release the unlock button on the a distance. The key fob does not need to key fob once to unlock the driver side be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! front door or twice within one second to system. unlock all doors and the liftgate. It is, however, possible to change the Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply current setting through the Information the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, and Entertainment System menu, so that remove the key fob from the vehicle and the system unlocks: lock your vehicle. All doors on the first push of the key Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or fob unlock button. with access to an unlocked vehicle. The driver door on the first push of the Allowing children to be in a vehicle key fob unlock button. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously The liftgate "independently" or "with or fatally injured. Children should be warned doors". 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal Key Fob or the gear selector. Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/unlocking the doors, and PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the activation of the courtesy light upon The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to unlocking the doors, can be activated or Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power deactivated through the Information and this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Entertainment System. For further will sound. information, refer to the Information and To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Entertainment System Owner’s Manual hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat Supplement. build-up may cause serious injury or death. second. When the panic alarm is active, The doors can also be unlocked by using the headlights turn on, the turn signals the emergency key, located inside the flash, the horn honks intermittently, and key fob. all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 16 Door And Liftgate Locking Car Finder 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Briefly pushing the lock button on the key The Car Finder feature will temporarily and extract the cover pulling downwards. fob will lock the doors and liftgate, switch activate the turn signals and headlights off the internal lights, and flash the turn to assist with locating the vehicle in a signals (if activated in the Information crowded area. and Entertainment System). To activate, push the lock or unlock If one or more doors are open, these button to remotely and temporarily doors will also lock, and this is indicated activate the turn signals and headlights. by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The Pushing the lock or unlock button again doors will unlock again only if the key fob will reactivate the lights switch on timer is detected inside the passenger (if the parking lights function was already compartment. active, it will remain active).

The doors can be locked by using the This function is available only if the doors 04016S0002EM emergency key in the driver’s side door are closed. Key Fob Cover Removal lock. 2. Remove the emergency key from its Opening The Liftgate housing. Rapidly push the button on the key fob twice to open the liftgate. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the liftgate has been opened. Remote Start The remote start button on the key fob enables engine starting (push the remote start 04016S0099EM Key Fob button on the key fob twice to enable engine Replacing The Electronic Key Fob 04016S0003EM starting). Battery Removing Emergency Key To replace the battery, proceed as follows:

17 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it Note: Changes or modifications not counter clockwise. expressly approved by the party Caution! responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the The battery replacement operation must be equipment. done with care, in order not to damage the electronic key.

Request For Additional Keys The system can recognize up to eight key fobs with remote control. To guarantee that the engine starts and 04016S0004EM the vehicle operates correctly, use only Removing Battery Plug electronic key fobs specifically coded for 4. Remove the battery from its slot and the vehicle’s electronics. replace it with a new one of the same If an electronic key fob is coded for a type. vehicle, it cannot be used on any other vehicle. General Information GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 04016S0005EM Battery Location 1. This device may not cause harmful Proceed in reverse order to reassemble interference, and the key. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 18 IGNITION SYSTEM Note: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Operation With the keyless ignition in the ON with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing position: if 30 minutes pass with the children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child To activate the keyless ignition, the key gear selector in P (Park) and the engine fob must be inside the vehicle. or others could be seriously or fatally stopped, the keyless ignition will injured. Children should be warned not to automatically reset to the STOP touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the position. transmission gear selector. With the engine started, it is possible Do not leave the key fob in or near the to remove the key fob from the vehicle. vehicle, (or in a location accessible to The engine will remain running and the children), and do not leave the ignition in the instrument cluster will indicate the AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate absence of the key fob when the door is power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. closed. Be sure the parking brake is fully For more information on engine start-up, disengaged before driving; failure to do so refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting can lead to brake failure and a collision. 04026S0001EM And Operating." Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button Always fully apply the parking brake when The keyless ignition has the following leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause modes: damage or injury. Also be certain to leave Warning! the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so STOP: engine off, steering locked. may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Never use the PARK position as a locking system, alarm, etc.) are still substitute for the parking brake. Always Driving the vehicle with the parking brake available. apply the parking brake fully when parked engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious ON: all electrical devices are available. to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. damage to the brake system. This state can be entered by pushing the ignition button once, without pressing the When exiting the vehicle, always make brake pedal. sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your Caution! AVV: engine starting. This state can be vehicle. entered by pushing the ignition button once while pressing the brake pedal. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 19 Starting With A Discharged Key Fob General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER Battery The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation If the key fob battery is discharged, applies to all radio frequency (RF) proceed as follows to start the vehicle: devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle by 1. Lift the front armrest. This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled found on the floor of the armrest Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the compartment while pushing the conditions: immobilizer is automatic whether the START/STOP button to start the ignition. vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code 2. This device must accept any transmitted by the key. If the code is interference received, including recognized as valid, the Engine interference that may cause undesired Immobilizer system enables engine operation. starting. When the ignition is brought back to Note: Changes or modifications not STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system expressly approved by the party deactivates the engine control unit, responsible for compliance could void the disabling engine starting.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE user’s authority to operate the equipment. For the correct engine starting 04026V0002EM procedures, refer to “Starting The Key Fob Placement Location Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped Yourvehicle may be equipped with a passive electronic steering wheel lock. The steering wheel lock is engaged when the driver door is opened with the ignition OFF.The steering wheel lock releases when the ignition is cycled ON.

20 Irregular Operation All keys provided with the vehicle SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — If the key code is not recognized during have been programmed in accordance IF EQUIPPED starting, the Engine Immobilizer with the electronics on the vehicle itself. Alarm Activation — If Equipped Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is Each key has its own code which must displayed on the instrument panel (refer be stored by the system's control unit. The vehicle security alarm monitors the to "Warning Lights And Messages" in Contact an authorized dealer to have vehicle doors and ignition for "Getting To Know YourInstrument new keys (up to eight) stored with a unauthorized operation. When the vehicle Panel"). This condition leads to the engine code. security alarm is activated, interior turning off after two seconds. In this switches for door locks are disabled. The case, switch the ignition to STOP and system provides both audible and visible then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with signals. the other keys provided. If it is still not While armed, the alarm will sound in the possible to start the engine, contact an following scenarios: authorized dealer. Opening of doors/hood/liftgate If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ (perimeter protection) Break-in Attempt icon is displayed while driving, this means that the system Operation of ignition with a key which is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a is not validated voltage drop). If the display persists, Cutting of the battery cables contact an authorized dealer. Movement inside the passenger Note: compartment (volumetric protection — if Do not tamper with the Engine equipped) Immobilizer system. Any modifications Unexpected lifting/tilting of the or alterations could cause the protection vehicle (anti-lift protection — if function to be deactivated. equipped) The Engine Immobilizer system is not Activation of the alarm triggers the compatible with certain aftermarket acoustic warning and the turn signals. remote starting systems. The use of Note: The alarm system is activated by these devices could cause problems the Engine Immobilizer system, which is when starting, as well as the automatically activated when you get out deactivation of the protection function. of the vehicle with the key fob and lock the doors.

21 To Arm The Alarm If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even To ensure the correct operation of the when the doors, hood, and liftgate are Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, With the doors, hood, and liftgate closed correctly closed, a fault has occurred in completely close the side windows. and the keyless ignition system placed in system operation. In this case, contact an the STOP position, push and release the To disable the function, push the authorized dealer. lock button on the key fob. The alarm can Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button also be armed by pushing the Passive To Disarm The Alarm before activating the alarm. Entry door handle button, located on the Push the unlock button on the key fob to exterior door handle. Refer to "Doors" in disarm the alarm. While disarming, the "Getting To Know YourVehicle” for following operations are performed: further information. Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if When the alarm is armed, the warning programmed). lights on the door handle trim remain on. Two brief acoustic signals (if programmed). Doors are unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed using the Passive Entry System, by grasping one of 04046S0002EM Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button the Passive Entry front door handles with a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For When the function is disabled, this is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE further information refer to "Passive indicated by the light on the Entry" in "Doors." Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button Note: The alarm does not disarm when flashing for several seconds. 04046V0001EM the doors are unlocked by inserting the Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Lock/Unlock Switches blade of the emergency key into the door Protection must be repeated each time The activation of the alarm is preceded handle lock cylinder. the ignition is cycled off. by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive detected, the system emits a further The vehicle security alarm system Entry acoustic signal. monitors the doors and liftgate for To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. If a second acoustic signal is emitted unauthorized entry and the ignition during a long period of vehicle inactivity), after the alarm is already armed, wait switch for unauthorized operation. insert the blade of the emergency key, about four seconds and disarm the alarm To ensure the correct operation of the found inside the key fob, into the door by pushing the unlock switch. Verify that protection, completely close the side handle lock cylinder and turn the the doors, hood, and liftgate are closed windows. If a perimeter violation triggers emergency key to the right (clockwise) to correctly. Then, reactivate the system by the security system, the alarm will sound lock the door(s). pushing the lock switch. and the exterior lights will flash. 22 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Warning! Caution! Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always automatically lock once the vehicle has parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all exceeded approximately 12 MPH build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). For personal security and safety in the Push the interior lock button on the driver event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as or passenger side door panel trim to lock you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The the doors. the vehicle. Outside Push the interior lock button on the rear Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When locking the doors from the outside automatic transmission into PARK, apply door panel trim to lock the rear doors with the doors closed, push the lock only. the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and button on the key fob. With doors locked, push the unlock lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all button on the interior trim panel to doors locked and the liftgate open. When unlock the doors. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are activated, including the Allowing children to be in a vehicle liftgate if it is open. The liftgate will be unattended is dangerous for a number of locked when it is closed. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal outside, push the unlock button on the or the gear selector. key fob. Do not leave the key fob in or near the Locking/Unlocking Doors From The vehicle, or in a location accessible to Outside In An Emergency children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the If the battery is discharged or the key fob vehicle. is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the 04056V0001EM doors from the outside by inserting the Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency key as follows. Lock — Turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise) 23 Unlock — Turn the emergency key to Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained the left (counter clockwise) and the door handle is wet, the activation sensitivity of the Passive Entry function Passive Entry may be reduced, resulting in a longer The Passive Entry system can identify reaction time. the presence of a key fob near the doors Door Locking and liftgate. To lock the doors, proceed as follows: The system enables the doors and liftgate to be locked or unlocked without 1. Make sure that you have the key fob pushing any button on the key fob. and are close to the driver’s or The key fob is detected only after the passenger’s side door handle. 04056V0005EM system recognizes the presence of a 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle External Liftgate Release Button hand on one of the front door handles. If button or the Passive Entry liftgate Note: After pushing the Passive Entry the detected key fob is valid, the doors button, which is located next to the door handle button, you must wait two and the liftgate are unlocked (refer to the external liftgate release button. This will seconds before the doors can be Information and Entertainment System lock all doors and the liftgate. Door unlocked again using the passive entry Owner’s Manual Supplement for Passive locking will activate the alarm as well. door handle button. This feature makes it Entry Settings). possible to check whether the vehicle has Note: The key fob may not be able to be been locked correctly by pulling the door detected by the vehicle keyless-go handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE system if it is located next to a mobile not be unlocked again. phone, laptop, or other electronic device; The vehicle doors and liftgate can be these devices may block the key fob’s locked by pushing the lock button on the wireless signal and prevent the key fob or on the interior door lock. keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening Grasping the handle of the driver's door If the key fob does not work, e.g. because unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors its battery is discharged or the vehicle depending on the mode set using the 04056S0003EM battery is discharged, the emergency key Information and Entertainment System Passive Entry Door Handle Button can be used to unlock the driver side (refer to the Information and door. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To remove the emergency key from the Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). key fob, proceed as follows: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and extract the cover pulling downwards. 24 2. Remove the emergency key from the To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the key fob housing. the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle. Entry function features an automatic 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver door unlocking function. side door lock cylinder and turn it to the left (counter clockwise) to unlock the Once all of the vehicle doors are door. closed and locked, the vehicle will attempt to locate the key fob inside or outside of the vehicle.

04056S0004EM Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking If the key fob is detected inside the

04016S0002EM vehicle, the Passive Entry function Emergency Key Release Buttons automatically unlocks all the vehicle

04056S0003EM doors and flashes the turn signals. Passive Entry Door Handle Button If one or more key fobs are inside the passenger compartment, the lock button on the key fob inside the passenger compartment is temporarily disabled. The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected close to the outside of the vehicle. If the Passive Entry function is disabled using the Information and Entertainment

04016S0003EM System, the keyless-go system to avoid Emergency Key accidentally leaving the key fob inside the vehicle is deactivated. Note: 04056V0001EM Interior Lock Switch Panel The emergency key blade is not directional and can be inserted indifferently into the lock. 25 Liftgate Access On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, 2. This device must accept any Approaching the liftgate with a valid key the liftgate and the doors can be locked interference received, including fob, push the opening button to open the by pushing the button located near the interference that may cause undesired liftgate. opening button of the liftgate. operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Power Lock The power lock is a safety device that prevents the operation of the interior door handles and the door lock and unlock buttons. The power lock also 04056V0005EM 04056V0005EM prevent opening of the doors from inside External Liftgate Release Button Passive Entry Liftgate Button the passenger compartment. Note: System Activation/Deactivation It is recommended to lock the vehicle The Passive Entry system can be If the key fob is inadvertently doors each time the vehicle is parked. activated or deactivated using the forgotten inside of the cargo area, and Activating The Power Lock GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Information and Entertainment System. an attempt is made to close it from The power lock is enabled on all the doors outside, the liftgate will not lock. With General Information by quickly pushing the lock button on the the doors locked, the liftgate unlocked, The following regulatory statement key fob twice. and the key fob detected inside the applies to all radio frequency (RF) vehicle, the liftgate will unlock again and The turn signals will flash to let you know devices equipped in this vehicle: the lights flash twice. that the power lock is active. This device complies with Part 15 of the If one or more of the doors are not closed Before driving, make sure the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada correctly, the power lock will not activate, liftgate is closed correctly. license-exempt RSS standard(s). preventing a person from getting stuck Operation is subject to the following two Liftgate Lock inside the passenger compartment by conditions: entering the vehicle, and then closing, the The liftgate of the vehicle may still be open door. locked by pushing the lock button on the 1. This device may not cause harmful key fob, pushing the door lock button on interference, and Deactivating The Power Lock the door handles, or pushing the lock The power lock disengages button on the interior door panel of the automatically: vehicle. 26 When the doors are unlocked, pushing Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged Unlock driver’s door lock with the the unlock button on the key fob. Battery emergency key When the keyless ignition is placed in Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if Operate the internal door handle the ON position. the vehicle battery is discharged. Note: For the rear doors, if the Child Child Safety Locks 1. With the doors unlocked insert the Safety Locks are engaged, and the emergency key from the key fob into the previously described locking procedure is To provide a safer environment for small door lock manual release lock cylinder. carried out, operating the internal handle children riding in the rear seats, the rear will not open the door. Instead, it will only doors are equipped with a realign the lock release device. To open Child-Protection Door Lock system. the door, the outside handle must be This device can only be engaged with the used. The door central locking/unlocking doors open. buttons are not deactivated when the emergency lock is engaged.

04056S0008EM Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clockwise for the right door locks or 04056S0007EM Child Safety Lock Positions counterclockwise for the left door locks. Lock position: device locked (door 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the opened from exterior only) manual release lock. Unlock position: device unlocked (door Proceed in one of the following ways to may be opened from the inside) realign the door lock device (only when the battery charge has been restored): The Child Safety Locks remain locked even if the doors are unlocked. Push the lock button on the electronic Note: The rear doors cannot be opened key from the inside when the Child Safety Push the unlock button on the door Lock is engaged. panel 27 SEATS Seatback Recline The front seats can be adjusted to ensure The angle of the seatback can be maximum comfort for the occupants. adjusted forward or rearward. Push the When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep seatback switch forward or rearward, the shoulders resting firmly against the and the seat will move in the direction of backrest, the wrists within reach of the the switch. Release the switch when the top of the steering wheel, and the seat desired position is reached. close enough to allow the driver to fully Power Lumbar — If Equipped depress the brake pedal. Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped 04066V0003EM with power lumbar. The power lumbar Warning! Power Seat Adjustment switch is located on the outboard side of 1 — Seat Switch (For/Rear/Height Ad- the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, justment) inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 2 — Seatback Switch lumbar support. Push the switch upward people riding in these areas are more likely 3 — Lumbar Adjustment or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. to be seriously injured or killed. 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons (If Do not allow people to ride in any area of Equipped) Height Adjustment your vehicle that is not equipped with seats The height of the seats can be adjusted

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in up or down. Pull upward or push these areas are more likely to be seriously downward on the seat switch, and the injured or killed. Caution! seat will move in the direction of the Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a switch. Release the switch when the seat and using a seat belt properly. desired position is reached. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If Power Front Seats damage to the seat controls. Seat travel Equipped Note: The conformation of the seats may become limited if movement is stopped The seat angle can be adjusted in four by an obstruction in the seat's path. may vary according to the versions. directions. Lift or push the front part of The power seat switch is located on the seat switch to move the front part of the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Forward/Rearward Adjustment seat in the corresponding direction. Use this switch to move the driver's seat Push the seat switch forward or rearward Release the seat switch when the seat up, down, forward, and rearward, or to to adjust to your desired position. has reached the desired position. recline the seatback.

28 Power Bolster Adjustment — If Driver Memory Seat Equipped The driver memory seat buttons can Push the power bolster adjustment store and recall three different driver’s buttons to regulate the width of the seat positions, as well as outside power backrest through the lateral padding. mirror positions. Storing and recalling Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped can be done with the ignition in the ON Lift the adjustment lever and push the mode, vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), front of the cushion forward or rearward and the driver’s side door closed, or for to extend the cushion by a few inches 3 minutes after having opened the (centimeters). driver's side door. An audible chime is heard to confirm a memory profile is set 04066V0015EM or recalled. To set a memory profile, first Driver Memory Seat Buttons Location adjust your seat (and power mirror position if desired) until you are in the 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons desired position. Then, push the memory button you want to assign the set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a new seat position is memorized, the Warning! previously memorized position on the same button is automatically overwritten. Recalling a memorized Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving 04066S0017EM position can also be done for could result in loss of control which could Seat Cushion Extension approximately 3 minutes after the doors cause a collision and serious injury or death. 6 — Adjustment Lever are opened and for approximately 1 minute after the engine is stopped. To Seats should be adjusted before recall a memorized position, push the fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death assigned button briefly. could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

29 Heated Seats — If Equipped The “Minimum” setting is automatically Note: To preserve the battery charge, deactivated once a certain period of time these functions cannot be activated Front Heated Seats has elapsed. This varies on a when the engine is OFF. With the engine in the ON position, push case-by-case basis, in accordance with the driver or passenger heated seat the specific operating conditions. button located on the instrument Warning! Note: The heated seat function can only panel. be activated in temperatures below 39°F (4°C). Persons who are unable to feel pain to the Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, On models that are equipped with remote medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other start, the front heated seats can be physical condition must exercise care when programmed to come on during remote using the seat heater. It may cause burns start. The feature can be activated even at low temperatures, especially if used through the Information and for long periods of time. Entertainment System. Refer to the Do not place anything on the seat or Information and Entertainment System seatback that insulates against heat, such Owner’s Manual Supplement for further as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the 04066V0004EM1 information. seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Heated Seat Buttons that has been overheated could cause Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped serious burns due to the increased surface Youcan select three heating levels:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE If equipped with rear heated seats, the temperature of the seat. Maximum — Three LED indicators controls can be found on the rear of the illuminated on the buttons center console and will function the same as the front heated seat controls. Average — Two LED indicators illuminated on the buttons Minimum — One LED indicator illuminated on the buttons After selecting a heating level, heat will be felt within a few minutes. A quick push of the heated seat button will select the heat levels in order of highest to lowest. A fourth push of the button will turn the heated seat off. 04046V0002EM Rear Heated Seat Buttons 30 Split Folding Rear Seat 3. Pull the left-hand seat back release 3. Pull both seat back release levers to lever (inside the luggage compartment or fold down the backrests. They will fold The rear seat allows the luggage the release at the base of the rear seat forward automatically. If necessary, compartment to be partially (40/20/40) accessible from the rear doors) to fold assist the backrests during the initial or totally extended. down the left side, or the right-hand seat stage of tilting. back release lever to fold down the right It is also possible to disengage the side of the backrest. It will fold forwards sections of the rear seat from inside the automatically. If necessary, assist the luggage compartment or by using one of backrest during the initial stage of tilting. the two levers located below the rear seat. Each lever folds down the section of the backrest on the same side.

04066V0005EM Split Folding Rear Seat Partial Extension Of The Luggage Compartment (40/20/40) Extending the right side of the luggage 04066V0009EM compartment allows you to carry two Seat Back Release Lever In Luggage passengers on the left part of the rear Compartment 04066V0007EM seat, while extending the left side allows 1 — Seat Back Release Lever Seat Back Release Lever Below Rear you to carry one passenger. Seat Proceed as follows: Full Expansion Of The Luggage Repositioning The Backrests 1. Completely lower the rear seat head Compartment Move the seat belts to the side, making restraints. Tilting the rear seat completely forward sure that they are correctly extended and allows for maximum loading volume. not twisted. Also make sure that they are 2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't not caught on anything behind the impede the movement of the backrest Proceed as follows: backrests of the seats. Then, lift the while tilting it. 1. Completely lower the rear seat head backrests by pushing them rearward until restraints. you hear the lock click into place on both attachment mechanisms. 2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede the movement of the backrest while tilting it. 31 Central Backrest Section Repositioning HEAD RESTRAINTS Warning! Using the head restraint, lift the central Head restraints are designed to reduce portion upwards, manually guiding it back the risk of injury by restricting head into place. Lightly push to make sure that movement in the event of a rear impact. Be certain that the seatback is securely it is properly latched. Make sure that the Head restraints should be adjusted so locked into position. If the seatback is not armrest is properly latched by gently securely locked into position the seat will not that the top of the head restraint is trying to move it. If it is not latched, located above the top of your ear. provide the proper stability for child seats repeat the operation. and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Easy Entry Function Warning! The Easy Entry function is designed to Central Backrest Section Tilting retract the driver side seat automatically Before tilting the backrest, make sure by 2.36 in (60 mm) to make it easier for A loose head restraint thrown forward in that the rear center seat belt is not the driver to get in and out of the car. a collision or hard stop could cause serious fastened and that there aren't any The movement is activated only if the injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. objects on the seat itself (if there are any, seat is set to a driving position which is in Always securely stow removed head remove them). front of the B pillar of the vehicle. restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. Pull the release strap upward to release The function is associated with power the central part of the backrest from its front seats for each of the three stored ALL the head restraints MUST be housing and tilt it forward using the head positions. reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE restraint. The Easy Entry function can be instructions above prior to operating the activated/deactivated through the vehicle or occupying a seat. Information and Entertainment System. Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) 04066V0008EM The front head restraints may be Center Backrest Section Tilting height-adjustable. To adjust them, operate as follows:

32 Upward adjustment: Pull upward on Note: To allow for maximum visibility for the head restraint until it clicks into the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a place. passenger, the head restraint can be lowered to the fully lowered position. Downward adjustment: Push the adjustment button and lower the head Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) restraint at the same time.

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver, should 04066V0010EM not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat Rear Head Restraint until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the 1 — Adjustment Button risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. 2 — Release Button Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly Note: To allow for maximum visibility for 0322125341US adjusted or removed could cause serious the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a Front Head Restraint injury or death in the event of a collision. passenger, the head restraint should be 1 — Release Button lowered to the fully lowered position. 2 — Adjustment Button The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal) restraints can be adjusted. The head To remove the head restraints, proceed restraint of the center seat, if equipped, as follows: cannot be adjusted, only removed. Warning! For upward adjustment, pull upward on 1. Recline the seat back to allow the head restraint until it clicks into clearance of the head restraint from the place. vehicle’s roof. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat For downward adjustment, push in the 2. Raise the head restraints to their until the head restraints are placed in their adjustment button and lower the head maximum height. proper positions in order to minimize the restraint at the same time to the desired risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. height. 3. Push the adjustment button and the release button at the side of the two Head restraints should never be adjusted supports at the same time. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly 4. Pull upward on the head restraint to adjusted or removed could cause serious fully remove it. injury or death in the event of a collision. 33 To reinstall the head restraints, proceed STEERING WHEEL as follows: Steering Wheel Adjustments 1. Hold down both the adjustment The steering column is able to be tilted button and release button while placing upward or downward. It also allows you the head restraint posts into the holes. to lengthen or shorten the steering 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to column. The tilt/telescoping lever is the appropriate height for the located below the steering wheel at the passengers. end of the steering column. 3. Replace the seat back to the appropriate position for passengers.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. 04086V0001EM Steering Wheel Adjustment 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle 2 — Closed 3 — Open 4 — Tilt Movement 5 — Telescoping Movement

34 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Warning! With the ignition in the ON position, push Warning! the heated steering wheel button on the instrument panel. Do not adjust the steering column while Persons who are unable to feel pain to the driving. Adjusting the steering column while skin because of advanced age, chronic driving or driving with the steering column illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, unlocked, could cause the driver to lose medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this physical conditions must exercise care when warning may result in serious injury or death. using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. To Adjust The Position: Do not place anything on the steering 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control wheel that insulates against heat, such as a Handle down to the open position. blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the 04086V0002EM1 wheel heater to overheat. desired position. Heated Steering Wheel Button 3. Lock the desired position by pushing The indicator on the button will illuminate the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to when this feature is enabled. the closed position. Note: The heated steering wheel function can only be activated in temperatures below 39°F (4°C). Warning! Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any start, the heated steering wheel can be after-market operation involving steering programmed to come on during remote system or steering column modifications start. The feature can be activated (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that through the Information and could adversely affect performance. Doing Entertainment System. Refer to the so could void the New Vehicle Limited Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY Information and Entertainment System PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also Owner’s Manual Supplement for further result in the vehicle not meeting information. type-approval requirements.

35 MIRRORS Electrochromic Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. The electrochromic mirror has a power button to activate/deactivate the automatic dimming/anti-glare function.

04106V0004EM 04106V0005EM Power Mirror Control Folding Mirror 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob Automatic Activation A — Left Activating the central door locking B — Right system from outside the vehicle C — Power Folding Position automatically folds the mirrors. The D — Neutral mirrors return to the driving position when the vehicle is then unlocked. 04106S0002EM If the door mirrors were folded using the Electrochromic Mirror Power Button Note: Once adjustment is complete, GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE power mirror control knob, they can only rotate the knob to the neutral position to When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the be returned to the driving position by prevent accidental movements. automatic dimming feature is rotating the knob again. deactivated. Power Folding Note: The power folding operation can Exterior Power Mirrors With the power mirror control knob in the be enabled only when the vehicle speed is neutral position, rotate it to the power lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). Power Adjustment folding position. Rotate the knob back to Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If The power mirrors can be adjusted with the neutral position to return the mirrors Equipped the ignition ON . to the driving position. Like the electrochromic mirror, an Select the desired mirror by rotating the If the power mirror control knob is moved automatic dimming feature is also power mirror control knob to the left (L) again during door mirror folding (from available on the outside rear view mirrors or right (R) position. closed to open position and vice versa), to prevent glare. The automatic dimming To adjust the selected mirror, push the the movement direction is reversed. button for these mirrors is the same as knob in the direction desired. the electrochromic mirror.

36 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only when the ignition is in the ON mode, Warning! Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside of the steering wheel on the instrument information. convex mirror will look smaller and farther panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various away than they really are. Relying too much of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the dashboard will be on side convex mirrors could cause you to instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are collide with another vehicle or other object. light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. Use your inside mirror when judging the size lights. or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex In addition, there are buttons for parking Automatic Headlights mirror. sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the Refer to “Starting And Operating” for headlights on or off according to ambient Heated Mirrors further information. light levels. Push the rear defrost button, located Function Activation within the climate controls, to activate From the O (off) position, rotate the light the heated mirrors. switch to the (auto) position. Note: The function can only operate with the ignition position cycled to ON. Function Deactivation To deactivate the function, rotate the light switch to a position other than the (auto) position. 04126V0001NA Headlight Switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) With the ignition cycled to ON, and the 1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient 2 — Parking Lights, Daytime Running external light, the Daytime Running Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off. 4 — Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the 5 — Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime Running Lights will be decreased for as long as the turn signals are on. 37 If equipped, the DRL can be Parking Lights Function Activation activated/deactivated from the With the ignition in STOP mode, rotate With the headlights on, cycle the ignition Information and Entertainment System, the headlight switch to the position to to STOP mode and the timer will start. by selecting the following functions in turn the parking lights on. All of the Note: To activate this function, the sequence on the main MENU: parking lights will turn on for eight headlights must be deactivated within 1. “Settings.” minutes, and opening the door activates two minutes after the ignition has been an audible warning. cycled to the STOP mode. 2. “Lights.” To leave only the lights on one side Function Deactivation 3. “Daytime Lights.” (right/left) illuminated, you must move This function is deactivated by turning on the multifunction lever (located on the the headlights, the side lights, or by Note: The Daytime Running Lights left side of the steering wheel) to the side cycling the ignition to ON mode. cannot be deactivated in Canadian that you want to remain on. With the markets. parking lights on, the warning light on Adaptive Headlight System (AFS) — If Equipped Rear Fog Lights the instrument panel will illuminate. Note: Cycling the ignition to ON mode This is a system combined with Xenon The rear fog light switch is located within turns off the parking lights, which were headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if the headlight switch. only illuminated on one side. equipped) which directs the headlights Push the button, located in the center horizontally, and continuously and of the headlight switch, to turn the rear Headlight Off Delay automatically adapts them to the driving fog lights on/off. The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays conditions around bends or when GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The rear fog lights turn on only when the the turning off of the headlights after the cornering. headlights or parking lights are also vehicle’s engine has been stopped. The system directs the headlights to light turned on. The lights can be turned off by The function can be activated from the up the road in the best way, taking into pushing the button again or by turning Information and Entertainment System account the speed of the vehicle and the the headlight switch to the O (off) by selecting the following functions in bend or corner angle, as well as the speed position. sequence on the main menu: of steering. When the engine is stopped with the rear The adaptive lights are automatically 1. “Settings.” fog lights on, they will be off the next activated when the vehicle is started. time the engine is started. 2. “Lights.” 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” The side lights and the headlights stay on for a time that can be set between 30, 60, and 90 seconds.

38 High Beam Headlights Automatic High Beam Headlights — If If the high beam headlights are operated To activate the fixed high beam Equipped again (pushing the multifunction lever headlights, push the multifunction lever, The Automatic High Beam Headlights towards the instrument panel), the located on the left side of the steering system provides increased forward warning light/icon will illuminate in the wheel, towards the instrument panel. The lighting at night by automating high beam instrument panel, and the main beam headlight switch must first be turned to control through the use of a digital headlights only will be on until the speed the (auto) or (on) position. camera mounted on the windshield. This exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). With high beam headlights on, the camera detects vehicle specific light and When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is High Beam Indicator on the automatically turns from high beams to exceeded again, the automatic instrument panel will illuminate. low beams until the approaching vehicle functioning is reactivated. is out of view. If the multifunction lever is pushed again This function is enabled when “Automatic with the Automatic High Beam High Beam” is turned to “ON” within the Headlights activated, the function Information and Entertainment System, deactivates. and is then activated by rotating the This feature can also be deactivated by headlight switch to the (auto) rotating the headlight switch to the position and pushing the multifunction position. lever toward the instrument panel. While the high beam headlights are on, Note: the blue icon/warning light will If the system recognizes heavy illuminate in the instrument panel. traffic areas, the automatic functions 04126S0020EM Multifunction Lever Note: The “On” selection within the remain disabled independently of the Information and Entertainment System is vehicle’s speed. The high beam headlights are turned off saved if the vehicle is cycled OFF, and by pulling the multifunction lever The Automatic High Beam then back ON. functionality may also be influenced by: rearward to its original position. The When the speed is higher than 37 mph warning light/icon will turn off in the (60 km/h) and the function is active, the Reflections on road signs instrument panel when the high beams lights will turn off if the multifunction Dim headlights from oncoming traffic are turned off. lever is pushed again. Poor weather conditions Flashing The Headlights When the speed is lower than 15 mph Pulling the multifunction lever toward the (25 km/h) and the function is active, the Presence of dirt or other steering wheel will activate the high feature will turn the high beam headlights obstructions on the sensor off. beam headlights manually. The lights will Damage to the windshield remain on as long as the lever is held. Once the lever is released, the lights will resume the previous setting. 39 Turn Signals INTERIOR LIGHTS Note: Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that the overhead lights are off. This will To activate the turn signals, move the Front Map Reading Lights multifunction lever, located on the left prevent the battery from discharging side of the steering wheel, up or down The front map/reading and overhead once the doors are closed. If a light is left until it reaches the detent. Moving the lights are mounted in the overhead on accidently, the overhead lights will lever upward flashes the right turn signal console. Each light can be turned on by turn off automatically approximately and moving the lever downward will flash pushing the corresponding switch on the 15 minutes after the engine has been the left turn signal. console. These switches are backlit for cycled OFF. The or turn signal will blink on the night time visibility. To turn the lights off, Overhead Light Timing push the switch a second time. instrument panel. On certain models, to assist getting in The turn signals turn off automatically and out of the vehicle at night or in when the vehicle is brought back onto a poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have straight course. been provided. “Lane Change” Function Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle Tap the lever up or down once, without — The overhead lights turn on according moving beyond the detent, and the turn to the following modes: signal (right or left) will flash five times. Will illuminate for a few seconds when Then, the turn signal (right or left) will the doors are unlocked. automatically turn off. Will illuminate for approximately three

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To turn off the flashing before the end of 04136S0001EM minutes when one of the doors is opened. the cycle, move the lever in the opposite Overhead Console direction until the first click (about half Will illuminate for a few seconds when way). 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch the doors are locked. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 3 — Overhead Lights Switch cycled to ON mode. 4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When Three Modes Are Available For Turning Doors Open Off Overhead Lighting: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light Switch When all doors are closed after entering the vehicle, the three-minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a seconds timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the interior lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will stop when the ignition is cycled to ON mode.

40 When doors are locked (either with key Interior Ambient Lighting fob or with key inserted on driver side The brightness of the interior passenger door), the overhead light turns off. compartment lights can be adjusted The interior lights will turn off after through the Information and 15 minutes to preserve the battery. Entertainment System. To access the adjustment function, on the Timing While Getting Out Of The main menu select the following items in Vehicle — After cycling the ignition to sequence: STOP mode, the overhead lights will turn on as follows: 1. "Settings."

For a few seconds after the engine 0403132211US 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." stops. Lift For Sun Visor Mirror 3. "Lights." For approximately three minutes when The courtesy light turns on automatically one of the doors is opened. by lifting the cover. The lights can be adjusted to seven different levels of brightness. For a few seconds when the last door Glove Compartment Light Door Light is closed. This light turns on automatically when the This vehicle is equipped with courtesy The timing stops automatically when the glove compartment is opened and turns door light that illuminate the entry for the doors are locked. off when it is closed. driver or passenger when the door is Vanity Mirror Lights — If Equipped The light turns on and off regardless of opened, and turns off when it is closed. the ignition status. On the driver and passenger sun visor, The light turns on and off regardless of there is a light that illuminates the sun the ignition status. visor mirror when the sun visor is folded down and the mirror cover is lifted.

04136V0003EM Glove Compartment Light 04136V0007EM Courtesy Door Light 41 On vehicles equipped with a "Passive Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights Entry" system, another light can be found The luggage compartment features two under each exterior door handle. courtesy lights. These courtesy lights turn on automatically when the liftgate is opened and turn off when it is closed.

04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 1 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light 04136S0005EM 2 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light Exterior Door Handle Light 3 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light Rear Overhead Light Switch The rear overhead lights are activated or 4 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light 04136V0006EM deactivated by on/off switches located Switch Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights on the front overhead console or within The courtesy lights will turn on and off GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the rear overhead lights themselves. The light turns on when a door is opened. regardless of the ignition position. Note: The light will turn off Note: If the liftgate is left open, the automatically after a few minutes if a lights will automatically turn off after door is left open. To turn it on again, open 15 minutes to prevent discharging of the another door or close and reopen the battery. same door.

42 Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS Windshield Wiper/Washers With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk headlights on, rotate the dimmer control upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on brightness and the control button icons. the right side of the steering wheel. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. 0403142699US Damage to the windshield wipers may result Windshield Wiper Stalk if the wiper control is left in any position Operation: The switch within the wiper other than off. stalk can be set to the following In cold weather, always turn off the wiper positions: switch and allow the wipers to return to the Windshield Wiper Off. 04126V0055EM “Park” position before turning off the Dimmer Control engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle Low Continuous Wiper Speed. is restarted. High Continuous Wiper Speed. Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from Windshield Wiper Operation returning to the off position. If the Rotating the switch to the position windshield wiper control is turned off and activates the first (low) level continuous the blades cannot return to the off position, speed of the windshield wipers in manual damage to the wiper motor may occur. mode. Rotating the switch to the position activates the second (high) level continuous speed of the windshield wipers in manual mode.

43 Rain Sensors stroke) when the windshield is dry, to wiper at continuous speed (fast Rotating the switch to the position, Warning! activates the first, less sensitive level of operation) with intense rain. the Rain Sensing function. Activation Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You Rotating the wiper switch to position activates the second, more sensitive or activates the rain sensor. level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the The activation of the rain sensor system to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm is done by tapping the wiper stalk information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and upwards while the switch is in the or functions. during windshield washer use. position. Windshield Washer Operation The variation in sensitivity during rain Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor sensor operation is also signaled by a to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the stroke of the wiper (command acquired Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature and implemented). This stroke is also windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and executed with the windshield dry. wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for If the windshield washer is used with the and washers will continue to operate until the driver. rain sensor activated, the normal washing stalk is released. cycle is performed, after which the rain The windshield wiper stops working three sensor resumes its normal automatic

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE strokes after the stalk is released, operation. followed by a final stroke six seconds Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area later to complete the cycle. clean. Mist Deactivation Use this feature when weather Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition conditions make occasional usage of the to STOP mode. wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward In the event of malfunction of the rain to the MIST position and release for a sensor while it is active, the windshield single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146V0002EM wiper operates intermittently at a speed to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor consistent with the sensitivity setting of the windshield or morning dew. The feature is especially useful for road the rain sensor, whether or not there is Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield rain on the glass for as long as the sensor windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. failure is indicated on the display. washer fluid onto the windshield, the The sensor continues to operate and it is washing function must be used. The sensor has an adjustment range that varies progressively from wiper still (no possible to set the windshield wiper to continuous mode or . The failure 44 indication remains on for as long as the HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF CLIMATE CONTROL sensor is active. EQUIPPED Passenger Compartment Air Vents The rain sensor is able to recognize and The windshield wiper stalk operates the automatically adjust itself in the Side Air Vents headlight washers when the ignition is in presence of the following conditions: the ON position and the headlights are To adjust the position of the Side Air Presence of dirt on the controlled turned on. The windshield wiper stalk is Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). located on the right side of the steering (2) in any direction. column. To use the headlight washers, pull Presence of streaks of water caused Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) the stalk toward you and release it. The by the worn window wiper blades. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side headlight washers will spray a timed Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Difference between day and night. high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise each headlight lens. In addition, the will open the vent. Rear Window Wiper/Washer windshield washers will spray the Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with windshield and the windshield wipers will the windshield wiper operating, activates cycle. a single cycle of the rear window wiper. Note: The headlight washers work on Activation of the rear window every tenth wash cycle request. wiper/washer can be done by moving the stalk to one of the following positions: Pushing the stalk towards the instrument panel activates the rear window washer (a brief push activates one washing cycle, keeping the stalk pushed washes continuously until the 04156V0002EM stalk is released). Side Air Vents Pushing the stalk downward 1 — Fixed Side Air Vents activates/deactivates continuous rear 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster wiper operation.

45 Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (4) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Adjuster (4) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. down will close the vents. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04156V0004EM 04156V0003EM Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 3 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent 4 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster

46 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

04156V0005EM Automatic Climate Control System 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

47 Air recirculation Rear Defroster Caution! The Climate Control System can also be System deactivation operated manually by using the buttons and knobs on the faceplate. Operating Mode The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which Manual selections will override the does not pollute the environment in the The Climate Control system can be event of accidental leakage. Under no automatic settings, which are stored until activated in different ways. It is circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, the AUTO button is pushed. If the system recommended to use the automatic which are incompatible with the components intervenes for safety reasons, the function. Push the AUTO button and set of this system. automatic setting will take control of the the desired temperatures. system. The automatic system adjusts the Description The below operations will not deactivate temperature, quantity, and distribution the automatic (AUTO) function: of air introduced into the passenger The Automatic Dual Zone Climate compartment. It also controls air Control System adjusts the temperature Air Recirculation activation/ deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air and air distribution independently conditioner. between the driver and passenger. A/C activation/deactivation At any time during automatic operation, The system maintains the set SYNC function activation you can change the temperature, activate temperature inside the passenger or deactivate the Rear Defroster, compartment and compensates for Rear Window Defrost activation/ activate SYNC, activate or deactivate outside temperature change. deactivation the air conditioner, and activate or GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Note: The reference temperature is 72 When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s deactivate air recirculation. The system °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort internal temperature is controlled will automatically adjust to the new management. according to the set temperature. settings. The automatic setting will adjust the The following can be manually set or Climate Control Display Settings following to maintain comfort within the adjusted: passenger compartment: The Climate Control settings are visible Driver/passenger air temperature on the Information and Entertainment Air temperature from the driver/front System radio screen. passenger side vents Blower speed (continuous variation) The display on the Information and Air distribution from the driver/front Air distribution (seven positions for Entertainment System is a pop up passenger side vents driver and passenger) window (1), which is activated by pushing Fan speed (continuous variation of the A/C activation the buttons or turning the knobs on the air flow) Climate Control system. The indicator Front Defroster lights located on the buttons and knobs Compressor variations (for Air recirculation indicate that the selected feature is cooling/dehumidifying the air) on/off. If no operation is performed for a 48 predetermined time, the pop-up will close (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate Air flow distributed between the on the display. these functions, rotate the Temperature floor vents, windshield, and front Adjustment Knob to the desired temperature. side window defrosting/demisting vents. This distribution setting Rear passengers’ temperature is linked to driver side selection. warms the passenger compartment while preventing the windows from Air Distribution Selection fogging up. Push the Air Distribution Selection In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls button on the faceplate to change the automatically manage the air mode of air distribution. The follow distribution. When set manually, the selectable option are explained below: respective symbols on the Information and Entertainment System indicate the Air flow to the windshield and 0521128655US air distribution setting. Climate Control Display Settings demister window vents to 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display demist/defrost them. Fan Speed Adjustment Air flow at the central and side Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase or decrease the blower speed. The speed Air Temperature Adjustment dashboard vents to ventilate the is displayed with lighted indicators in the chest and the face. Rotate the driver or passenger Information and Entertainment System Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise Air flow to the front and rear floor display. for warmer temperatures or vents. This setting heats the Maximum fan speed = all indicators counterclockwise for cooler passenger compartment the illuminated on the Information and temperatures. The set temperatures are quickest. Entertainment System display shown on the Information and Entertainment System. Air flow distributed between the Minimum fan speed = one indicator Push the SYNC button to sync the driver floor vents (hotter air) and the illuminated on the Information and and passenger air temperatures. central and side dashboard vents Entertainment System display Rotate the passenger Temperature (cooler air). This air distribution The fan can be turned off by rotating the Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC setting is useful on sunny days Blower Speed Knob clockwise to position function. This will set a new passenger during spring and autumn. O (all segments on the Information and side temperature. Entertainment System display are turned Rotate the Temperature Adjustment off). Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI Note: To restore automatic control of (maximum heating) setting or fully the fan speed, push the AUTO button. counterclockwise to engage the LO 49 AUTO Button temperature and return to separate air In automatic operation, air recirculation temperature management. will be controlled by the system When the AUTO button is pushed according to outside environmental (indicator illuminated), the Climate Air Recirculation And Air Quality conditions. Control system automatically adjusts the System (AQS) following settings: Air Recirculation is managed according to Note: Quantity and distribution of air flow in the following operating mode: With the AQS function active and the passenger compartment Automatic engagement: indicator is after the internal air recirculation The air conditioner illuminated above the “A”on the Air system has been functioning for a set Recirculation Button amount of time, the Climate Control Air recirculation System enables air intake to cycle the Forced activation (air circulation Cancels any manual settings air in the passenger compartment for a always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled Selecting the AUTO function illuminates above the icon on the Air during the air changes. the indicator on the A/C button. Recirculation Button The engagement of the recirculation If air distribution or the fan speed is Forced deactivation (air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the manual adjusted, the AUTO button always off with intake of outside air): required heating or cooling conditions indicator will turn off to indicate that the both indicators not illuminated on the Air faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use Climate Control system is no longer in Recirculation Button it on rainy/cold days as it can increase AUTO mode. The three operating conditions are the possibility of the windows fogging. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE After a manual adjustment, push the When the outside temperature is low, AUTO button to resume the automatic obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation Button in sequence. recirculation is forced off to prevent the system. windows from fogging up. SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped A/C Compressor Push the SYNC button (indicator When the automatic recirculation Push the A/C button or the icon to illuminated) to sync the passenger side function is selected, the AQS function activate or deactivate the A/C air temperature with the driver side air automatically activates internal air compressor (indicator illuminated when temperature. recirculation when the outside air is activated). The A/C compressor will This function makes temperature polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). remain off even after the engine has regulation easier when the driver is At low external temperatures or in high stopped. traveling alone. humidity, the automatic function turns When the A/C compressor is turned off, Turn the passenger Temperature off to avoid fogging up the windows. The the system deactivates air recirculation Adjustment Knob or push the passenger user can select the function again by to prevent the windows from fogging up. side Air Distribution Selection Button to pushing the Air Recirculation Button. If the climate control system can change the passenger side air maintain the temperature, with the A/C 50 turned off, the AUTO feature will remain Activate a blower speed based on the Humidity Sensor on and the AUTO button indicator light temperature of the engine coolant The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the will not switch off. Adjust the air flow towards the windows from fogging up. The AUTO To restore automatic control of the A/C windshield and front side windows function (indicator illuminated) must be compressor, push the A/C button or the on for the Humidity Sensor to function. icon or the AUTO button. With the A/C Activate the Rear Window Defroster When outside temperature is low, the compressor off, the air speed can be set Display the fan speed (indicators system may turn the compressor on and manually using the Air Speed Adjustment illuminated) and current air distribution turn air recirculation off for safer driving. Knob. setting When the A/C compressor is on, and the Switching Off/On The Climate Control Note: The MAX-DEF function remains engine is running, air speed cannot be System active for approximately three minutes lower than the minimum speed (only one once the engine coolant reaches the Switching Off The Climate Control indicator light is lit). proper temperature. System Note: When the A/C is off, the Climate When the function is on, AUTO mode will Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob Control system can not produce air that deactivate. The only manual operations completely counterclockwise to turn off is colder than the current outside possible are adjusting blower speed and the Climate Control System. temperature. Under certain turning off the Rear Window Defroster. With the air conditioner off: environmental conditions, windows could fog up rapidly since the air is not Pushing the button switches off the Air recirculation is on dehumidified. MAX-DEF function. The A/C compressor is off Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Rear Defroster The fan is off Function Push the Rear Defroster button to The heated rear window can be Push the Front Defroster button activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear activated/deactivated (indicator illuminated) to defrost the Defroster. windshield and side windows. The Rear Defroster will turn off after Note: The climate control system stores While in MAX-DEF function, the air 20 minutes or once the engine is turned the previously set temperatures and conditioner will: off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push resumes operation when any button on the Rear Defroster button. the system is pushed. Activate the air conditioner Note: To avoid damage, do not apply compressor when the weather allows stickers over the interior heating Turn air recirculation off filaments of the Rear Defroster. Set the maximum air temperature (HI) on both the driver and passenger side

51 Switching On The Climate Control Until the temperature drastically POWER WINDOWS System changes within the cabin, the climate Power Window Switches To switch the climate control system on control system will continue to maintain in automatic mode, push the AUTO the temperature while the engine is off. The power window switches work with button. By deactivating the Stop/Start system the ignition in the ON position and for with the button located on the three minutes after the ignition has been Stop/Start dashboard, the climate control system placed in the STOP position. When one of The Stop/Start system shuts off the will take priority over the engine shutting the front doors is opened, this operation engine when vehicle speed is 0 mph off. is disabled. (0 km/h), and the climate control system Note: Driver Side Front Door Controls will continue to maintain comfort within the vehicle. In harsh climate conditions, limit the The switches are located on the door use of the Stop/Start system to prevent panel trim. All windows can be controlled Stop/Start will deactivate in the from the driver side door panel. following scenarios: the compressor from continuously switching on and off. This will cause The climate control system is in AUTO rapid misting of the windows and the mode (indicator illuminated), and the accumulation of humidity in the vehicle has yet to reach the set passenger compartment. temperature When the Stop/Start system is on, The climate control system is in LO the climate control system will always

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE maximum cooling take air in from outside, reducing the The climate control system is in HI probability of the windows fogging up. maximum heating System Maintenance The climate control system is in the In winter, the Climate Control System 04166V0001EM MAX-DEF status must be turned on at least once a month Power Window Switches When the Stop/Start system is active, for approximately ten minutes. 1 — Front Left Window Switch the engine will restart if the inside Have the system inspected at an 2 — Front Right Window Switch temperature changes significantly, or if authorized dealer before the summer. 3 — Rear Right Window Switch the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is activated. 4 — Window Lockout Switch 5 — Rear Left Window Switch With Stop/Start system on, air flow is reduced to keep the compartment comfort conditions for longer.

52 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children on Push the buttons to open the desired Warning! window. board the vehicle. Each button has two position steps. The anti-pinch safety function is Press gently (first position step) for activated both during the manual and the Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, manual "burst" window travel, while automatic operation of the window. and do not let children play with power pressing the same button harder (second When the anti-pinch system is activated, windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to position step) activates "continuous the window closing is immediately children. Occupants, particularly unattended automatic" operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is children, can become entrapped by the If the button is pressed again, the window automatically reversed and the window windows while operating the power window will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in switches. Such entrapment may result in relation to the first stop position. The serious injury or death. Window Closing window cannot be operated during this Pull the window switch to the first detent time. to move the window upward. Pull the Note: In the event of an error, or if the window switch to the second detent, and anti-pinch protection is activated three the window will go up automatically. consecutive times, the automatic closing To Stop the window during Auto-UP operation of the window will be operation, push the window switch. deactivated. In order to restore the Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door correct operation of the system, the Controls window must be lowered. There are single window controls on the Power Window System Initialization passenger and rear door trim panels If power supply is interrupted, the which operate the door windows. electric window automatic operation Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch must be re-initialized. Protection - If Equipped To perform the initialization procedure, The vehicle may be equipped with an which must be done on each door with the anti-pinch safety device for closing the doors closed, manually fully close the windows. window to be initialized. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

53 POWER SUNROOF — IF In a collision, there is a greater risk of EQUIPPED being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured Power Sunroof or killed. Always fasten your seat belt The power sunroof consists of a single properly and make sure all passengers are glass panel and is fitted with a power also properly secured. sunshade the full length of the panel. Do not allow small children to operate the Operation of the sunroof is only possible sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other with the ignition in ON mode. Refer to body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. “Ignition System” in this chapter for

further information. 04186S0001EM The sunroof has three preset positions: Opening Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons Fully closed. To open the sunroof’s front panel, push 1 — Power Shade Open/Close the open/close button toward the rear of 2 — Sunroof Open/Close Button Comfort (intermediate opening). the vehicle to open to the comfort 3 — Vent Open/Close Fully open. position (half way). Pushing the button a second time will open to the fully open Note: Youcannot have the sunshade position. closed when the sunroof is open. The automatic motion can be interrupted Caution! in any position by pushing the open/close GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE button again. Warning! Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may Never leave children unattended in a damage it. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to Closing children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the From the complete open position, push ON mode. Occupants, particularly the open/close button toward the front unattended children, can become entrapped of the vehicle. The sunroof will close by the power sunroof while operating the completely. power sunroof switch. Such entrapment The automatic motion can be interrupted may result in serious injury or death. in any position by pushing the open/close button again.

54 Vent Opening Initialization Procedure HOOD To bring the roof into vent position, push Automatic operation of the sunroof must Opening The Hood and release the vent button. be initialized again in case of faulty To open the hood, proceed as follows: This type of vent opening can be sunroof operation. It may also be activated regardless of the position of necessary to initialize the sunroof after 1. Pull the release lever located on the the sunroof. When starting with the roof the vehicle’s battery as been driver’s side kick panel. in the closed position, pushing the vent disconnected and then reconnected. button automatically causes the sunroof Note: The anti-pinch safety device is to open to the vent position. If the roof is deactivated during the initialization already open, the button must be held procedure. until the roof reaches the vent-opening Proceed as follows: position. Pushing the vent button again during 1. Push the open/close button to bring automatic movement of the roof will stop the roof into the completely closed it. position. Power Sun Shade 2. Cycle the ignition to STOP mode and wait at least ten seconds. The sunshade is power operated. 04196V0001EM Hood Release Lever Push the Power Shade open/close button 3. Cycle the ignition to AVVmode. Refer toward the rear of the vehicle to open the to “Ignition System” in this chapter for 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and sun shade. further information. position yourself in front of the grille. Push the Power Shade open/close button 4. Hold the open/close button down for 3. Lift the hood slightly. toward the front of the vehicle to close at least ten seconds. Youshould then the sun shade. hear the mechanical stop of the roof The automatic motion can be interrupted motor. in any position by pushing the Power 5. Within five seconds, hold the Shade on/off button again. open/close button down. The roof will Pinch Protect Feature perform a complete opening and closing cycle (to indicate that the initialization The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety procedure has been successful). If this system capable of detecting the does not occur, the procedure must be presence of an obstacle during the restarted from the beginning. closing movement. If an obstacle is detected, the system intervenes and the movement of the sunroof is immediately reversed. 55 4. Move the under-hood latch from right Closing The Hood POWER LIFTGATE to left to release the hood. To close, lower the hood to Unlocking of the liftgate is electrically approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from operated and is deactivated when the the engine compartment then let it drop. vehicle is in motion. Make sure that the hood is completely If anything obstructs the power liftgate closed and fully latched. Do this by trying while it is closing or opening, the liftgate to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do will automatically reverse to the closed not try to push the hood lid down, but or open position, provided it meets open it and repeat the procedure. sufficient resistance. Note: Always check that the hood is The liftgate height is adjustable to avoid closed correctly to prevent it from difficulties in tight spaces. To customize opening while the vehicle is travelling. the liftgate opening position, proceed as 04196V0002EM Since the hood is equipped with a double follows: Hood Latch Location locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on each side. 1. Open the liftgate. 5. Raise the hood completely. The operation is assisted by the addition of 2. Manually move the liftgate to the two gas props which hold it in the open Warning! desired position. position. 3. Push one of the closing buttons for at Note: Be sure the hood is fully latched before least five seconds (successful GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully programming is indicated by the turn Use both hands to lift the hood. latched, it could open when the vehicle is in signals flashing three times). Before lifting, check that the windshield motion and block your vision. Failure to The liftgate is now programmed to open wiper arms are not raised from the follow this warning could result in serious to the set position. windshield or in operation. Also, ensure injury or death. that the vehicle is stationary and that This function can be selected on the the electric park brake is engaged. Information and Entertainment System. To set the liftgate opening height, refer Do not tamper with the props. to the Information and Entertainment Assist the hood while lifting it. System Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

56 Opening Note: A signal will chime while the liftgate is opening or closing. Opening From The Outside Youcan stop the liftgate from moving by When unlocked, the liftgate can be pushing the interior liftgate release opened from outside the vehicle by button again. pushing the external liftgate release switch. Push the switch until you hear a “click.” The liftgate can also be opened by quickly pushing the external liftgate release button on the key fob twice. 04206V0014EM Manual Lock Release Location Pull to release the lock.

04206V0002EM Interior Liftgate Release 1 — Interior Liftgate Release Switch

Liftgate Emergency Opening 04056V0005EM External Liftgate Release Switch There is a panel on the luggage compartment interior trim, next to the The turn signal indicators will blink and liftgate lock, accessible by folding down the interior lights will turn on when the the rear seat backrest, which allows 0318134894US liftgate is opened. They turn off access to the manual lock release. Manual Lock Release Cord automatically when the liftgate is closed. The liftgate can now be opened manually. The lights turn off automatically after a Closing few minutes if the liftgate is left open. Closing From Outside Opening From The Inside It is possible to close the liftgate by When the liftgate is locked, it can be pushing: opened from inside the vehicle by lifting the interior liftgate release button on the The power liftgate switch. driver’s door panel trim. 57 The power lock switch located on the Customizing The Liftgate Opening 4. Move your foot under the bumper, liftgate (all the doors, including the Height simulating a kick. When you have liftgate, will be locked). completed this movement, withdraw your To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you leg. To activate the liftgate, both sensors The liftgate button on the key fob can set the height at which the liftgate must detect your leg. twice. opens to. The Passive Entry liftgate switch on To customize the liftgate opening the liftgate. position, follow the steps below: 1. Open the liftgate manually and move it to the position that you want the liftgate to open to. 2. Press and hold one of the closing buttons for at least five seconds (successful acquisition is indicated by the turn signals flashing three times). 04206V0015EM The liftgate is now programmed to open Hands Free Liftgate Activation Zone to the set position. If it is closed, the Hands Free Liftgate 04056V0055EM Hands Free Liftgate — If Equipped unlocks and opens completely, and with Power Liftgate/Lock Switches

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE another movement of the foot, it stops. A 1 — Power Liftgate Switch To operate the Hands Free Liftgate further movement of the foot reverses System: 2 — Power Door Lock Switch the direction and closes the liftgate 1. If the doors are locked, the system completely, if you do not stop it again. must detect the electronic key near the If it is open, with a movement of the foot, Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate liftgate. the Hands Free Liftgate closes from moving with any of the Power completely, and with another movement Liftgate switches. 2. If the doors are unlocked, the system of the foot, it stops. If the liftgate is Closing From Inside does not have to detect the electronic stopped, another movement of the foot key near the liftgate. Push the power liftgate switch on the will reverse the direction and open it driver’s door panel trim and hold until the 3. Go to the rear of the vehicle, in the completely. operation is complete. center and about 3 feet (1 m) from the Note: To conserve the battery charge, Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate liftgate. avoid performing this operation from moving by releasing the switch. repeatedly with the engine off.

58 Youcan activate/deactivate the Hands 2. Then assist the cover pins into the Free Liftgate on the Information and slots located just inside the liftgate Caution! Entertainment System by pushing the opening. MENU button to select the Main menu, and selecting the following items: The Hands-Free Liftgate can be turned off manually in the Information and 1. Settings Entertainment System to avoid 2. Doors And Locks unintentional activation. For further information refer to the Information and 3. Automatic Liftgate Opening Select Entertainment System Owner’s Manual them by turning the Rotary Pad and Supplement. pushing it. Liftgate Initialization Note: Automatic operation of the liftgate must be initialized again in case 04206V0016EM Warning! Retractable Cargo Area Cover of faulty liftgate operation. Proceed as follows: 1 — Handle Driving with the liftgate open can allow 2 — Cover Pins poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. 1. Close all the doors and the liftgate. Youand your passengers could be injured by 2. Push the lock button on the key fob. these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when Removing The Cover: you are operating the vehicle. 3. Push the unlock button on the key fob. 1. Retract the cover by pulling the If you are required to drive with the handle slightly rearward to release the liftgate open, make sure that all windows Cargo Area Features cover pins. are closed, and the climate control blower Retractable Cargo Area Cover switch is set at high speed. Do not use the 2. Guide the cover forward until it is fully recirculation mode. The Retractable Cargo Area Cover can be rolled up and removed. retracted. To Use The Cargo Area Cover: Warning! 1. From the rolled up (retracted) position, hold the handle and pull the cover outward toward the rear of the During power operation, personal injury or vehicle. cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. 59 3. Pull the two cover hooks (one on each Lift up the load floor by the handle. Grocery Hooks side) towards the inside of the cargo Two hooks (one on the left side and one area. Then lift the cover up and remove it. on the right side) are also available on the side panels to fix loads that are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags).

04206V0004EM Load Floor 04206V0017EM Cover Attached Cargo Area Anchors The cargo area floor may be equipped 3 — Cover Hook 04206V0009EM with fixed or mobile anchoring loops that Grocery Hook allows you to anchor and secure luggage safely. Note: Do not apply a load greater than The fixed anchor loops are located in the 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Warning! four corners of the cargo floor. Cargo Area Adjustable Rail — If Equipped The mobile loops (if equipped), slide on In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the two guides secured to the cargo area vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around floor. in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the To position a loop, push down the center cargo floor or in the passenger button while sliding the loop along the compartment. Remove the cover from the guide to the desired position. Release the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not button and move the loop slightly to the store it in the vehicle. next fixed position in the notches on the guide.

To Access The Tire Service Kit — If 04206V0005EM Equipped Anchor Loops To access the "Tire Service Kit" (for its use, refer to "In Case Of Emergency"), proceed as follows: 60 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of the interior rear view mirror. They can be To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and sideways. as follows: To direct the visor toward the passenger 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the side window, detach the visor from the glove compartment by placing the interior rear view mirror side hook and emergency key into the lock on the turn it towards the side window. handle. From this position, the sun visor can also 2. Pull the handle to open the glove be extended toward the rear of the 04206V0011EM compartment. vehicle for additional blockage of Adjustable Anchor Loop — If Equipped sunlight. Lift the loop to fasten the load. Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be used even in poor light conditions.

04246V0001EM Opening The Glove Compartment 04206V0012EM When the glove compartment is opened, Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop To Use a light turns on to illuminate the inside of 0403132210US Cargo Net — If Equipped the compartment. Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger Cargo nets can be used to contain Note: Do not insert large objects that Window lightweight materials during transport. prevent the glove compartment from closing completely. Always make sure Note: A rear facing child restraint The cargo net is included in the optional system should never be fitted in the front “Convenience Package” and also available that the glove compartment is completely closed when driving. passenger seat. Always comply with the from your authorized dealer. instructions on the sun visor. Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more information. 61 Homelink Note: Without starting the engine, 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink activate the electric park brake and place button (1, 2 or 3). Description the ignition in the ON position. Homelink is a fixed system installed on 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins The following operation will delete the the vehicle. It can sync up to three to flash slowly, move the portable remote manufacture’s standard codes and does different devices that activate garage control one to three inches from the not need to be repeated during the doors, gates, lighting systems, and home HomeLink system (keeping the subsequent button programming: or office alarm systems. programmable button pushed down). Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and Programming If the indicator does not begin to flash 3). After about ten seconds, the lighted quickly, change the distance between the indicators will start to flash. Release both HomeLink and the portable remote Warning! buttons. control and try the procedure again. 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first Vehicle exhaust contains carbon slowly and then quickly. When the monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your indicator starts to flash quickly, release vehicle in the garage while programming the both buttons. transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Using The Homelink System Yourmotorized door or gate will open and The HomeLink system activates the close while you are programming the garage door or gate motor, just like the universal transceiver. Do not program the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE portable remote control. The vehicle transceiver if people, pets or other objects must be within the range of the garage are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener 04246S0006NA door and the ignition must be in the ON that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Garage Door Opener (Homelink) position. required by Federal safety standards. This Buttons Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). includes most garage door opener models 1 — Homelink Button 1 While the signal is being transmitted, the manufactured after 1982. Do not use a indicator is lit and the system (garage garage door opener without these safety 2 — Homelink Button 2 door, gate, etc.) will respond. features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, 3 — Homelink Button 3 If the HomeLink system does not on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety 4 — Homelink Indicator information or assistance. operate, the original portable remote control may be equipped with an Note: Follow the steps below to begin alternative code (refer to “Alternative programming your remote control to one Code Synchronization”). of the HomeLink buttons:

62 If necessary, the original remote control Yourmotorized door or gate will open and 2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1, can still be used to operate the system. close while you are programming the 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly, move the portable Alternative Code Synchronization universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects remote control one to three inches from To check whether the garage door or gate are in the path of the door or gate. Only use the HomeLink system (keeping the motor has an alternative code, proceed this transceiver with a garage door opener programmable button pushed down). as follows: that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This 3. Within 30 seconds, push the 1. Read the garage door or gate motor includes most garage door opener models programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. manufacturer manual. manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Push the programmed button a second garage door opener without these safety 2. The portable remote control seems to time and release it to conclude the features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, operation. For some motors, the have programmed to the HomeLink on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety system, but the garage door or gate can information or assistance. operation will probably have to be be neither opened or closed. repeated a third time to end the setting. The motor should now be capable of 3. Push the programmed button and Note: To program Homelink using an recognizing the signal transmitted by keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an Alternative Code, the vehicle must be HomeLink and then open/close the door alternative code system, the indicator within range of the garage door. Activate or gate. flashes briefly, and then remains off for the electric park brake and turn the two seconds. This sequence is repeated ignition to ON, without starting the Programming A Single Key for 20 seconds. engine. It is possible to program another original Proceed as follows: remote control on an already programmed HomeLink key by canceling 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on Warning! the previously stored frequency. the garage door or gate motor. The color and position may vary depending on the manufacturer (consult the garage door or Vehicle exhaust contains carbon Warning! monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” vehicle in the garage while programming the button (this normally activates the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious setting warning light). Vehicle exhaust contains carbon injury or death. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

63 Yourmotorized door or gate will open and indicator starts to flash quickly, release General Information close while you are programming the both buttons on the remote control. The following regulatory statement universal transceiver. Do not program the The system previously programmed to applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver if people, pets or other objects HomeLink has now been deleted and the devices equipped in this vehicle: are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener new system is ready to use. This does not This device complies with Part 15 of the that has a “stop and reverse” feature as affect the other two HomeLink buttons in FCC Rules and with Industry Canada required by Federal safety standards. This any way. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two includes most garage door opener models Deleting Programmed Keys manufactured after 1982. Do not use a conditions: garage door opener without these safety It is recommended to delete HomeLink features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, programming before selling the vehicle. 1. This device may not cause harmful on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety All three keys are deleted interference, and information or assistance. simultaneously. 2. This device must accept any Proceed as follows: interference received, including Note: Activate the electric park brake interference that may cause undesired 1. Push and hold the outer buttons and place the ignition to ON without operation. starting the engine. (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the indicator will start to flash. Note: Changes or modifications not Proceed as follows: expressly approved by the party 2. Release both keys. 1. Push the desired HomeLink button responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not Technical Information For After Sales release the button until the last Service equipment. operation has been performed. If you are unable to set up HomeLink Power Outlets 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins successfully after following the above The Instrument Panel Power Outlet is to flash slowly, move the portable remote instructions, contact After Sales Service located under the air conditioning control control 1 to 3 inches from the system (HomeLink free hotline number panel. It will only operate when the (keeping the programmable button 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following ignition is ON. pressed down). information: If the indicator does not begin to flash Vehicle make and model, including quickly, change the distance between the manufacturing year and country of HomeLink and the portable remote purchase; control and try the procedure again. Make, model, age and frequency of use The HomeLink indicator flashes, first of the original portable remote control (if slowly and then quickly. When the known).

64 Front Armrest The center console storage compartment is located between the front seats. To access the center console storage, lift the upper part of the center console as shown below.

04246V0003EM 04206V0010EM Instrument Panel Power Outlet Luggage Compartment Power Outlet Note: Do not connect devices, with a 115 Volt Power Inverter — If Equipped power rating higher than 180 W, to the The Power Inverter is located on the right outlet. Do not use power adaptors that side of the luggage compartment. It can do not fit the outlet as this may damage be used for small battery-powered it. electrical appliances with powers up to 04246V0004EM Luggage Compartment Power Outlet 150 W (e.g. cameras, video camera, Center Console tablets, razors, etc.) The Luggage Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left side of the luggage Note: Do not connect devices with compartment and only works with the powers higher than 150 W to the socket. Warning! ignition device in the ON position. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. Note: Do not connect devices with Do not operate this vehicle with a console powers higher than 150 W to the socket. compartment lid in the open position. Driving Do not damage the outlet by using with the console compartment lid open may unsuitable adaptors. result in injury in a collision.

04206V0013EM Power Inverter 65 Cupholder To re-close the armrest, lift it until it is Two cupholders are available in the inserted into the backrest. center console. There are two cupholders and a phone compartment inside the armrest.

04246V0005EM

Cupholders In Center Console 04246V0018EM To access the cupholders, slide the cover Rear Cupholder forward. To close the compartment, push Note: The armrest was not designed to the cover and it will close automatically. support the weight of an adult passenger Rear Armrest or a child. Only use it to hold drinks or GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE small objects. The rear armrest is foldable and can be stored in the backrest. To lower the armrest, pull on the tab located at the top of the seatback and fold it downward.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .68 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .70 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....75 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .96 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 96

67 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0005EM Instrument Cluster GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

68 Instrument Cluster Descriptions Note: If the low fuel warning light switches on, refuel at the earliest Caution! 1. Tachometer opportunity. Indicates the engine speed in 5. Speedometer revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the Indicates vehicle speed. Inside the tachometer there is a light temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and sensor capable of detecting ambient light stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air Note: The hard telltales will illuminate conditions and adjusting the operating conditioner turned off until the pointer drops for a bulb check when the ignition is first mode (night/day) and the brightness of back into the normal range. If the pointer cycled. the instrument panel and the Information remains on the “H”, turn the engine off and Entertainment System display. immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. 2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge The digital bar indicator monitors the 3. Instrument Cluster Display temperature of the engine oil and starts supplying indications when the fluid The instrument cluster display temperature reaches approximately features a driver-interactive display. 122°F (50°C). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” Under normal usage, the digital scale for further information. should hover around the middle of the scale according to the working 4. Fuel Gauge conditions. The digital bar gauge shows the amount of fuel in the tank. Warning! The warning light turns on, a message is displayed and there is an acoustic signal when about 2.4 gallons A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. (9 liters) of fuel are left in the tank. Youor others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. Youmay want to The fuel pump symbol points to the call an authorized dealer for service if your side of the vehicle where the fuel door is vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under located. the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

69 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Instrument Cluster Display

70 Reconfigurable Display Items 5. Compass Home 1. Headlight Warning Lights 6. Reconfigurable Main Area The parameters shown on the display, for Displays the headlight warning light for Can display the following screens: the modes: Dynamic, Natural and either of the following active modes: Advanced Efficiency are: Home Headlights Time Trip A Outside Temperature Automatic Headlights Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Current Speed (shown if the repeat 2. Gear Selector Information through the Information and modes of the Phone and Navigation Entertainment System) functions are not active) Displays the following information Range controlled by the gear selector function: Performance P = PARK The screens can be selected, on rotation, by pushing the MENU selection button on R = REVERSE the windshield wiper stalk. N = NEUTRAL D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in manual (sequential) driving mode – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode 05036S0004NA 3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Instrument Cluster Display Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: 05036V0002EM MENU Selection Button Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Depending on the driving mode chosen Lane Departure Warning (LDW) using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, and Advanced Efficiency, the screens can Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise be graphically different. Navigation Control (ACC) (if equipped) instructions and call information can be 4. Speed Limit Warning Light set and displayed in the Information and Entertainment System. Shows information regarding the Speed 0401144046US Limiter function. Instrument Cluster Display 71 Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down The screen graphically reproduces some the MENU button on the windshield wiper parameters closely linked to the For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, stalk. efficiency of the driving style, with a view and Advanced Efficiency) and with the to limiting consumption. ignition device ON, the "Trip computer" can be used to display the measurements Advanced Efficiency regarding the operating state of the vehicle. This function is characterized by two separate records, called “Trip A”and “Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by Information and Entertainment System), where the “complete missions” (journeys) are recorded in a reciprocally independent manner. “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display 05036V0002EM the values relating to: Reset Button Performance Distance travelled 05036S0011NA Dynamic Driving Style Average fuel consumption The displayed parameters differ according to the active mode. The modes The three central icons on the screen Average speed which can be selected using the Alfa DNA indicate the effectiveness of the driving Active trip system are: style, linked to the following parameters: Natural acceleration, deceleration and gear Fuel consumption indicator shifts, with a view to limiting consumption. The bar below the icons shows current consumption and the green line represents the optimal area. The globe lights up gradually according to

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lower consumption.

05036S0007NA 05036S0009NA Instrument Cluster Display Efficiency Consumption Graph 72 Dynamic 9. Odometer Multiple settings can be programmed by Indicates the total miles travelled. the user using the Information and Entertainment System. This section U.S. Federal regulations require that describes only the basic settings: upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct Units & Language mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Time&Date If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should Cluster leave the odometer reading the same as To access the settings list in the it was before the repair or service. If s/he Information and Entertainment System, cannot do so, then the odometer must be proceed as follows: set at zero, and a sticker must be placed 05036S0013NA Push the MENU button to access the Acceleration Gauge in the door jamb stating what the mileage main menu. was before the repair or service. It is a The displayed parameters are related to good idea for you to make a record of the Select “Settings” from he main menu vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the odometer reading before the using the Rotary Knob. trend of the longitudinal/lateral repair/service, so that you can be sure accelerations (G-meter information), that it is properly reset, or that the door considering gravity acceleration as a jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer reference unit. must be reset at zero. Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. Customer Programmable Settings 7. Vehicle Range Indicates the miles left before the fuel tank is empty. Displays the position by indicating the 05036S0040EM cardinal direction. MENU button 8. Failure Warning Lights

Area dedicated to displaying failures, the 05036S0015EM following symbols could be displayed on Information and Entertainment System rotation: Low criticality symbols (yellow amber) High criticality symbols (red) 73 Units & Language Clock & Date Cluster

0401135760US 0501142760US 0401135762US Units & Language Selectable Menu Clock & Date Selectable Menu Options Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Options Menu Options The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified under the “Clock & Date” menu: The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: under the “Cluster” menu: Sync With GPS Time: activates or Measure Units: select US, metric, or deactivates the clock synchronization Warning Buzzer Volume: set the custom. The custom option allows for through the GPS. If the function is volume of the warning buzzer individual selection of the unit measures deactivated, the options Set Time and Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip Language: change the language of the Set Date are enabled function system Set Time: set the time manually Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate Restore Settings: restores the factory Time Format: set the time format to repeating the Phone function screens on settings either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock) the instrument cluster display To access and the change the setting, Set Date: set the date manually Restore Settings: restores the factory turn and push the Rotary Pad. settings GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad. To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

74 WARNING LIGHTS AND The failure indicators appearing on MESSAGES ON THE the display are divided into two INSTRUMENT PANEL categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a The following pages consist of warning repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” lights and messages. Less serious faults are indicated by a Note: warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. Youcan stop the warning cycle in both The warning light turns on together cases by pushing the button located on with a dedicated message and/or chime the windshield wiper stalk. The when applicable. These indications are instrument panel warning light will stay precautionary and as such must not be on until the cause of the failure is considered as exhaustive and/or eliminated. alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure indication.

75 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by ON turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the This light monitors various brake functions, including ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the approximately four seconds. The light should then turn brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light also will turn on when the parking brake is disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the does not show the degree of brake application. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. have the system checked as soon as possible. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has Release the electric park brake, then check that the been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake warning light has turned off. Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

76 Warning Light What It Means What To Do AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. 77 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible. on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

78 As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Yourvehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

79 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

80 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF EQUIPPED Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled. FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

81 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

82 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Warning Light What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer. 83 Warning Light What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, shut off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top ENGINE TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT offwith coolant and check that the level is between the This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the the telltale comes on when the engine is started again. temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale allowed to cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. POWER STEERING FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. Note: Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the central position. DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not Close all the doors properly. completely shut. An chime will signal when the doors is open and the vehicle is moving.

84 Warning Light What It Means What To Do HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open Fully close the hood. hood appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving. LIFTGATE OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the liftgate is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the liftgate. open liftgate appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

85 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Place the gear selector in the park position and turn the This telltale, along with the related message, signals a vehicle off: the telltale should switch off. Start the failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC). vehicle. If the telltale remains solid (the telltale does not If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the flash) with engine running, the vehicle can still be driven engine is running. until proper maintenance can be performed. If the telltale If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate flashes with the engine running, do not drive the vehicle. intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated. place and the vehicle may need to be towed. LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. OIL OVER MAXIMUM LEVEL Run the engine under 3000 RPM during this time. The telltale turns on, along with the respective message on the instrument cluster display, to indicate that the engine oil level is too high.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The illumination of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BRAKE DISC TEMPERATURE Avoid aggressive brake maneuvers, hovering over the When the telltale illuminates, it indicates an excessive brake pedal, and reduce vehicle speed to allow brake temperature of the brake discs. systems to cool down.

86 Amber Symbols

Warning Lights What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

87 Warning Lights What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

88 Warning Light What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

STOP/START SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

89 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

90 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies with factory parts.

91 Warning Light What It Means What To Do Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED Note: This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the discs have reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies with factory parts.

Warning!

It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer. dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

GENERIC INDICATION

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Signals information and failures. Contact an authorized dealer. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE This telltale will illuminate along with an accompanying Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have message when the AWD dynamic control system is the failure eliminated. temporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD mode in this instance.

92 Warning Light What It Means What To Do TEMPORARY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce the load This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWD to allow the system to cool down. The AWD system will dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to resume normal operation when the symbol disappears prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD from the display. mode in this instance.

ABS ACTIVATION This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABS system has activated.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION SELECTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.” Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to the TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILURE socket. If the fault persists the next time you start the The telltale illuminates to indicate that there has been a engine, contact an authorized dealer to have the system failure in the control unit that manages the trailer lights. checked.

93 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LIFTGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale illuminates to indicate a liftgate electric the failure eliminated. opening/closing system failure.

Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

STOP/START SYSTEM OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM The telltale illuminates when the HDC system intervenes.

94 Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

95 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on The aim of the OBD system (Onboard when the engine is running, and that the Diagnostic) is to: OBD II system is ready for testing. ONLYan authorized service technician Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate an increase in emissions diagnose, or service your vehicle. your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery Indicate the need to replace damaged If unauthorized equipment is connected to replacement. If the OBD II system should components the OBD II connection port, such as a be determined not ready for the I/M test, driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which your vehicle may fail the test. can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, Yourvehicle has a simple ignition makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be actuated test, which you can use prior to stored in the electronic control units impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident going to the test station. To check if your together with a series of specific involving serious injury or death. vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you parameters for engine operation and must do the following: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON including personal information. position, but do not crank or start the Note: After eliminating a fault, to check engine. the system completely, your authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if Note: If you crank or start the engine, necessary certain road tests. you will have to start this test over.

96 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition Regardless of whether your vehicle's switch to the ON position, you will see the OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” illuminated during normal vehicle symbol come on as part of a normal bulb operation you should have your vehicle check. serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one because the MIL is on with the engine of two things will happen: running. The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

97 This page is intentionally left blank

98 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 100 the safety systems that your vehicle may AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . .104 be equipped with, and provides OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .114 instructions on how to use them SAFETYTIPS ...... 139 correctly.

99 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The system also improves control and The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws The vehicle may be equipped with the stability of the vehicle when braking on a of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor following active safety devices: surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

SAFETY The Electronic Braking Force Distribution afforded. Drive Train Control (DTC) System (EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing the brake force to be distributed The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive System speed in turns, following another vehicle too System Intervention Traction Control System (TCS) closely, or hydroplaning. The ABS equipped on this vehicle is The capabilities of an ABS equipped Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System provided with the "Brake-By-Wire" vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless Hill Start Assist (HSA) System (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. or dangerous manner that could jeopardize With this system, the command given by the user’s safety or the safety of others. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) pressing the brake pedal is not System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Drive Train Control (DTC) System Hill Descent Control (HDC) System Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the pedal with the traditional system Some models of this vehicle are equipped For system operation, see the following is no longer noticeable. with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), pages. which offers an optimal drive for countless driving conditions and road Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Warning! surfaces. The system reduces tire An integral part of the braking system, slipping to a minimum, automatically the ABS prevents one or more wheels redistributing the torque to the front and from locking and slipping in all road The ABS contains sophisticated rear wheels as needed. surface conditions, regardless of the electronic equipment that may be To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with intensity of the braking action. The susceptible to interference caused by AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel system ensures that the vehicle can be improperly installed or high output radio drive (RWD) when the road and controlled even during emergency transmitting equipment. This interference environmental conditions are such that braking, allowing the driver to optimize can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. stopping distances. capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified When the road and environmental The system intervenes during braking professionals. conditions require better traction, the when the wheels are about to lock, vehicle automatically switches to AWD typically in emergency braking or Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to mode. low-grip conditions where locking may be a collision. Pumping makes the stopping more frequent. distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. 100 Note: Understeer occurs when the vehicle is Vehicle modifications, or failure to There may be a brief delay in shifting turning less than it should according to properly maintain your vehicle, may change to AWD mode after a tire slipping event the angle of the steering wheel. the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance occurs. System Intervention of the ESC system. Changes to the steering If the system failure symbol switches The intervention of the system is system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely on, after starting the engine or while indicated by the flashing of the ESC driving, it means that the AWD system is affect ESC performance. Improperly warning light on the instrument panel, to inflated and unevenly worn tires may also not working properly. If the warning inform the driver that the vehicle degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle message activates frequently, it is stability and grip are critical. modification or poor vehicle maintenance recommended to carry out the that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC maintenance operations. system can increase the risk of loss of Warning! vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal Electronic Stability Control (ESC) injury and death. System The ESC system improves the directional Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot Traction Control System (TCS) control and stability of the vehicle in prevent the natural laws of physics from various driving conditions. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the The system automatically operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on understeer and oversteer, distributing including those resulting from excessive one or both drive wheels on roads that the brake force on the appropriate speed in turns, driving on very slippery are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending wheels. The torque supplied by the surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot on the slipping conditions, two different engine can also be reduced in order to prevent accidents resulting from loss of control systems are activated: maintain control of the vehicle. vehicle control due to inappropriate driver The ESC system uses sensors installed input for the conditions. Only a safe, If the slipping involves both drive on the vehicle to determine the path that attentive, and skillful driver can prevent wheels, the system intervenes, reducing accidents. The capabilities of an ESC the power transmitted by the engine. the driver intends to follow and equipped vehicle must never be exploited in compares it with the vehicle’s effective a reckless or dangerous manner which could If the slipping only involves one of the path. When the real path deviates from jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of drive wheels, the Brake Limited the desired path, the ESC system others. Differential (BLD) function is activated, intervenes to counter the vehicle’s automatically braking the wheel which is understeer or oversteer. slipping (the behavior of a self-locking Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is differential is simulated). This will turning more than it should according to increase the engine torque transferred to the angle of the steering wheel. the wheel which isn't slipping. 101 System Intervention or in any case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right foot to be The intervention of the system is Warning! indicated by the flashing of the ESC moved easily from the brake pedal to the warning light on the instrument panel, to accelerator. The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent

SAFETY inform the driver that the vehicle The system will automatically deactivate stability and grip are critical. the natural laws of physics from acting on after two seconds without starting, the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction gradually releasing the braking pressure. Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA During this release stage, it is possible to The PBA system is designed to improve cannot prevent collisions, including those hear a typical mechanical brake release resulting from excessive speed in turns, the vehicle’s braking capacity during noise, indicating the imminent movement emergency braking. driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a of the vehicle. The system detects emergency braking PBA-equipped vehicle must never be by monitoring the speed and force with exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, Warning! which the brake pedal is pressed, and which could jeopardize the user's safety or consequently applies the optimal brake the safety of others. pressure. This can reduce the braking There may be situations where the Hill Start distance: the PBA system therefore Hill Start Assist (HSA) System Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight complements the ABS. rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or This is an integral part of the ESC system Maximum assistance from the PBA with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a that facilitates starting on slopes, trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active system is obtained by pressing the brake activating automatically in the following pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake driving involvement. It is always the driver’s cases: responsibility to be attentive to distance to pedal should be pressed continuously other vehicles, people, and objects, and most during braking, avoiding intermittent Uphill: the vehicle is stationary on a importantly brake operation to ensure safe presses, to get the most out of the road with a gradient higher than 5%, the operation of the vehicle under all road system. Do not reduce pressure on the engine is running, the brake is pressed, conditions. Yourcomplete attention is brake pedal until braking is no longer and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) always required while driving to maintain necessary. or a gear other than REVERSE (R) is safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The PBA system is deactivated when the engaged. these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. brake pedal is released. Downhill: the vehicle is stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, the engine is running, the brake is pressed, and the transmission is in REVERSE (R). When starting from a stop, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, 102 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System HDC aims to create vehicle stability and Activation of the HDC system is The DST function uses the integration of safer driving in various situations, indicated by the white icon appearing the ESC system with the electric power including poor grip conditions and steep in the instrument cluster display. steering to increase the safety level of descents. the whole vehicle. The system has three different modes: In critical situations for example (braking Off: the system is deactivated on surfaces with different grip conditions), the ESC system influences Enabled: the system is enabled and the steering through the DST function to ready to intervene when the activation implement an additional torque conditions are met contribution on the steering wheel in Active: the system actively controls order to suggest the most correct the vehicle speed maneuver to the driver. Enabling The System The coordinated action of the brakes and 06006V0002EM steering increases the safety and control To enable the system, push the HDC HDC Symbol of the vehicle. switch located on the steering wheel. Activation Of The System Note: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course Once enabled, the HDC system will of action through small torques on the activate automatically if the vehicle is steering wheel, which means the driven on a downhill slope with sufficient effectiveness of the DST feature is highly gradient, greater than 8%. dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and The speed set for the HDC system can be overall reaction to the applied torque. It adjusted using the SET switch located on is very important to realize that this the steering wheel. feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. 06006V0001EM Hill Descent Control (HDC) System HDC Switch The HDC function is an integral part of The system is enabled if the car speed is the ESC system, keeping the vehicle at a below 20 mph (30 km/h). The system constant speed while descending a hill by stays enabled until the car speed reaches actively controlling the brakes. 37 mph (60 km/h), the system is disabled at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h).

07146V0017EM HDC Speed SET Switch 103 Once the desired speed has been Disabling The System AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS reached, release the SET switch and the The system is disabled if any of the The following auxiliary driving systems HDC system will maintain the set speed. following conditions are met: are available in this vehicle: After set speed is established, the HDC system will automatically brake to keep The HDC switch is pressed. Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If SAFETY the vehicle at the set speed if the Cruise Control / Active Cruise Control Equipped accelerator pedal is released and the is activated. Forward Collision Warning Plus vehicle gets close to the set speed. A vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is (FCW+) — If Equipped It is possible to reduce the set speed with exceeded. the brake pedal. When the pedal is Tire Pressure Monitoring System released, the system will adjust the set System deactivation is shown by the icon (TPMS) speed to the new current speed. on the display turning off. Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System Note: If the vehicles speed exceeds — If Equipped 6 mph (10 km/h), but remains below Warning! 37 mph (60 km/h) and the accelerator The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system pedal is released, as soon as the vehicle uses two radar sensors, located in the gets close to the set speed the HDC HDC is only intended to assist the driver in rear bumper (one on each side), to detect system will automatically brake to keep controlling vehicle speed when descending the presence of other vehicles in the rear the vehicle at the set speed. hills. The driver must remain attentive to the side blind spots of your vehicle. driving conditions and is responsible for The driver can cancel HDC system maintaining a safe vehicle speed. intervention at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. System Deactivation The HDC system will be deactivated, but remain available, if any of the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling on a downhill slope with a gradient less than 8%, on a level surface, or on an uphill grade. 06016V0001EM Rear Sensor Location PARK (P) mode is engaged.

104 The system warns the driver about the This area begins from the door mirror and presence of other vehicles in the extends for approximately 19 feet (6 m) Warning! detection area by illuminating the toward the rear part of the vehicle. warning light located within the door When the sensors are active, the system mirror on the side in which the other monitors the detection areas on both The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an vehicle was detected. If equipped, an sides of the vehicle and warns the driver aid to help detect objects in the blind spot audible chime will also be heard to alert about the possible presence of vehicles zones. The BSM system is not designed to the driver (if option is selected within the in these areas. detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Information and Entertainment System). Even if your vehicle is equipped with the While driving, the system monitors the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s detection area from three different input mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use points (side, rear and front) to check your turn signal before changing lanes. whether an alert needs to be sent to the Failure to do so can result in serious injury or driver. The system can detect the death. presence of a vehicle in one of these three areas. Note: Note: For the system to operate properly, The system does not alert the driver the rear bumper area where the radar of the presence of fixed objects (e.g. sensors are located must stay free from safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). snow, ice and dirt gathered from the 0434132127US road surface. BSM Indicator Light However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of Do not cover the rear bumper area When the engine is started, the warning these objects. This is normal and does where the radar sensors are located with light illuminates briefly to signal the not indicate a system malfunction. any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, driver that the system is active. etc.). The system does not alert the driver Sensors about the presence of vehicles coming If you wish to install a rear tow eye The sensors are activated when any from the opposite direction, in the after purchasing the vehicle, you will forward gear is engaged at a speed adjacent lanes. need to deactivate the system via the higher than approximately 6 mph Information and Entertainment System. (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. To access the function, select the following items in sequence on the main The sensors are temporarily deactivated menu: when the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is in PARK (P). 1. “Settings.” The detection area of the system covers 2. “Safety.” approximately a lane on both sides of the 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” vehicle which is around 9 feet (3 m). 105 Rear View Note: If the sensors are covered by The visual warning on the mirror will blink The system detects vehicles coming from objects or vehicles, the system may not if the driver activates the turn signals, the rear part of your vehicle on both sides work as intended. thus indicating the intention to change and entering the rear detection area with lane.

SAFETY a difference in speed of less than 31 mph The warning light will be constant if the (50 km/h) in relation to your vehicle. Warning! driver stays in the same lane. Overtaking Vehicles "Blind Spot Alert" Function If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a Deactivation with a difference in speed of less than back up aid system. It is intended to be used When the system is deactivated ("Blind approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and the to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP vehicle stays in the blind spot for a parking lot situation. Drivers must be systems will not emit neither an acoustic careful when backing up, even when using approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning RCP.Always check carefully behind your nor visual warning. light on the door mirror of the vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check The BSM system will store the operating corresponding side illuminates. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, mode that was active when the engine If the difference in speed between the obstructions, and blind spots before backing was stopped. Each time the engine is two vehicles is greater than up. Failure to do so can result in serious started, the operating mode last set will approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the injury or death. be recalled and used. warning light does not illuminate. General Information Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) Operating Mode System The system may be activated/ This vehicle has systems that operate on This system assists the driver during deactivated via the Information and radio frequency that comply with Part reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced Entertainment System. To access the 15 of the Federal Communications visibility. function, select the following items on Commission (FCC) rules and with the main menu in sequence: Industry Canada Standards RSS- The RCP system monitors the rear GEN/210/220/310. detection areas on both sides of the 1. “Settings.” vehicle to detect objects moving toward Operation is subject to the following two the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum 2. “Safety.” conditions: speed between approximately 1 mph 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” 1. The device may not cause harmful (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects interference. moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph "Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" Mode (35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots. When the system is enabled, the warning 2. The device must accept any The system activation is signaled to the light within the door mirror on the side of interference received, including driver by an audible warning. the detected object illuminates. interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

106 Changes or modifications to any of these In the event of an imminent collision, the seconds. Make sure you press the brake systems by other than an authorized system intervenes by automatically pedal if the vehicle moves slightly service facility could void authorization applying the vehicle’s brakes to prevent a forward. to use this equipment. collision or reduce its effects. Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) The system provides the driver with System — If Equipped audible and visual signals through Warning! specific messages on the instrument This is a driving assistance system cluster display. composed of a radar located behind the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The system may lightly brake to warn the intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor front bumper and a camera located in the driver if a possible frontal accident is center of the windshield. can FCW detect every type of potential detected (limited braking). Signals and collision. The driver has the responsibility to limited braking are intended to allow the avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via driver to react promptly, in order to braking and steering. Failure to follow this prevent or reduce the effects of a warning could lead to serious injury or death. potential accident. In situations with the risk of collision, if Engagement/Disengagement the system detects no intervention by The following functions can be selected the driver, it provides automatic braking in sequence using the Information and to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the Entertainment System: potential frontal collision (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on 1. “Settings.” the brake pedal is detected, but not 06016V0003EM 2. “Safety.” Front Bumper Radar Location deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” reaction of the braking system, therefore reducing vehicle speed further 4. “Mode.” (additional assistance in braking stage). Select from among three operating The system will intervene automatically modes: in case of imminent collision or impact Warning and brake: the system (if against a pedestrian crossing the road active), in addition to the visual and (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h). audible warnings, provides limited Note: For safety reasons, when the braking, automatic braking and additional vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers assistance in braking stage, where the may remain blocked for about two driver does not brake sufficiently in the 06016V0004EM Windshield Camera Location event of a potential frontal impact. 107 Only warning: the system (if active), When the ignition is in the ON position. potential collision, but permits more does not provide limited braking, but dynamic driving of the vehicle. When the vehicle speed is between guarantees automatic braking or 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system sensitivity setting is kept in additional assistance in braking stage, the memory when the engine is turned where the driver does not brake at all or When the front seat belts are

SAFETY OFF. not sufficiently in the event of a potential fastened. frontal impact. System Limited Operation Warning Changing The System Sensitivity If a dedicated message is displayed, a Disable: the system does not provide The sensitivity of the system can be condition limiting the system operation visual and audible warnings, limited changed through the Information and may have occurred. The possible reasons braking, automatic braking or additional Entertainment System menu, choosing of this limitation are something is assistance in braking stage. The system from one of the following three options: blocking the camera view or a fault. will therefore provide no indication of a "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the possible collision. If an obstruction is signaled, clean the description in the Information and area of the radar on the front bumper, Activation/Deactivation Entertainment System Supplement for and the camera area on the windshield. how to change the settings. The Forward Collision Warning system is If a fault in the system is occurring, it will activated whenever the engine is started The default setting is "Med". With this still be possible to drive the vehicle regardless of what is shown in the setting, the system warns the driver of a normally, but automatic braking will not Information and Entertainment System. possible collision with the vehicle in front be available in the event of an impending when that vehicle is at a standard Following a deactivation, the system will collision. distance, between that of the other two not warn the driver about the possible When the conditions limiting the system settings. collision with a preceding vehicle, functions end, this will go back to normal regardless of the setting selected in the With the system sensitivity set to "Far", and complete operation. Should the fault Information and Entertainment System. the system will warn the driver of a persist, contact your authorized dealer. possible collision with the vehicle in front Note: Each time the engine is started, when that vehicle is at a greater distance, System Failure Signaling the system is activated regardless of thus providing the possibility of acting on If the system turns off and a dedicated what setting was selected when the the brakes more lightly and gradually. message is shown on the display, it engine was turned OFF. This setting provides the drivers with the means that there is a fault with the This function is not active at a speed maximum possible reaction time to system. lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than prevent a potential accident. In this case, it is still possible to drive the 124 mph (200 km/h). With the option set to "Near", the system vehicle, but you are advised to contact The system is active: will alert the driver of a possible collision your authorized dealer as soon as Each time the engine is started. with the vehicle in front when that vehicle possible. is close. This setting offers the driver a When feature is selected within the lower reaction time compared to the Information and Entertainment System. "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a 108 Radar Indication Not Available trim and cleaning the radar surface could Vehicles traveling at right angles to the If conditions are such that the radar be required. Have this operation vehicle. cannot detect obstacles correctly, the performed at your authorized dealer. Note: In particularly complex traffic system is deactivated and a dedicated Note: It is recommended that you do not conditions, the driver can deactivate the message appears on the display. This install devices, accessories or system manually through the Information generally occurs in the event of poor aerodynamic attachments in front of the and Entertainment System. visibility, such as when it is snowing or sensor or darken it in any way, as this can raining heavily. compromise the correct functioning of Driving Close To A Bend The function of this system can also be the system. When entering or leaving a wide bend, the temporarily reduced due to obstructions system may detect a vehicle in front you, Frontal Collision Alarm With Active but not driving in the same driving lane. In such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Braking — If Equipped such cases, a dedicated message will be cases such as these, the system may If this function is selected, the brakes are shown on the display and the system will intervene. operated to reduce the speed of the be deactivated. This message can vehicle in the event of potential frontal sometimes appear in conditions of high impact. reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions This function applies an additional limiting the system functions end, it will braking pressure if the braking pressure go back to normal and complete applied by the driver does not suffice to operation. prevent potential frontal impact. In certain cases, this dedicated message The function is active with speed above could be displayed when the radar is not 4 mph (7 km/h). detecting any vehicles or objects within Driving In Special Conditions its view range. In certain driving conditions, system 06016V0005EM If atmospheric conditions are not the intervention might be unexpected or Driving Around Wide Curves reason behind this message, check if the delayed. The driver must therefore be sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to very careful, keeping control of the clean or remove any obstructions in the vehicle to drive in complete safety. area. Driving close to a bend. If the message appears frequently, even in the absence of atmospheric conditions The vehicle ahead is leaving a such as snow, rain, mud or other roundabout. obstructions, contact your authorized Vehicles with small dimensions and/or dealer for a sensor alignment check. not aligned in the driving lane. In the absence of visible obstructions, manually removing the decorative cover Lane change by other vehicles. 109 The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout On a roundabout, the system could intervene when it detects a vehicle ahead

SAFETY that is leaving the roundabout.

06016V0006EM 06016V0008EM Driving Near Small Vehicles Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range Lane Change By Other Vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the same lane as your vehicle within the Warning! 06016V0010EM operating range of the radar sensor, may Driving In Roundabouts cause the system to intervene. Vehicles With Small Dimensions The system has not been designed to And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in The system cannot detect vehicles in advance. Failure to take into account this front of the vehicle if they are outside the warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. range of the radar sensor or may not react to small vehicles, such as bicycles The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of or motorcycles. reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the 06016V0007EM vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the Other Vehicles Changing Lanes system may intervene inside multi-story Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on The Vehicle the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of the real driving The system could temporarily react to a scenario coverage by the system and must vehicle that is passing at right angles not be regarded as faults. through the radar sensor’s operating range. 110 The system has been designed for road Tire Pressure Monitoring System level. Therefore, if insufficient tire use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, (TPMS) pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning the system must be deactivated to avoid The vehicle is equipped with a Tire light displaying in the instrument cluster, unnecessary warnings. Automatic Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that increase the inflation pressure up to the deactivation is signaled by the dedicated sends the inflation pressure information prescribed cold inflation value. warning light/symbol switching on in the of each tire to the control unit, and will The system will automatically update, instrument panel (refer to the instructions in the "Warning Lights And Messages On The signal the driver in the event of and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your insufficient tire pressure. Warning Light” will turn off once the Instrument Panel" for further information). Tire pressure will vary with temperature system receives the updated tire by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every pressures. The vehicle may need to be 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the driven for up to 20 minutes above General Information outside temperature decreases, the tire 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS This vehicle has systems that operate on pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure to receive this information. radio frequency that comply with Part should always be set based on cold Operating Example inflation tire pressure. This is defined as 15 of the Federal Communications For example, your vehicle may have a the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Commission (FCC) rules and with recommended cold (parked for more than been driven for at least three hours, or Industry Canada Standards RSS- three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a GEN/210/220/310. (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is three hour period. The cold tire inflation Operation is subject to the following two 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire pressure must not exceed the maximum conditions: pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a inflation pressure molded into the tire temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will 1. The device may not cause harmful sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing decrease the tire pressure to interference. And Maintenance” for information on approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. pressure is low enough to turn on the 2. The device must accept any The tire pressure will also increase as the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” interference received, including vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there Driving the vehicle may cause the tire interference that may cause undesired should be no adjustment for this pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi operation of the device. increased pressure. (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Changes or modifications to any of these The TPMS will signal the driver if Monitoring Warning Light” will still be on. systems by other than an authorized pressure falls below the warning limit for In this situation, the “Tire Pressure service facility could void authorization any reason, including the effects of low Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off to use this equipment. temperature and normal loss of pressure only after the tires are inflated to the from the tire. vehicle’s recommended cold placard The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient pressure value. tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation 111 Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication Packed snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Caution! If an insufficient pressure value is detected on one or more tires, the Using tire chains on the vehicle. warning light in the instrument cluster Using wheels/tires not equipped with

SAFETY The TPMS has been optimized for the will display alongside the dedicated original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS messages, the system will highlight the TPMS sensors. pressures and warning have been tire or tires with insufficient pressure After the punctured tire has been established for the tire size equipped on graphically, and an acoustic signal will be repaired with the original tire sealant your vehicle. Undesirable system operation emitted. or sensor damage may result when using contained in the TireKit, the previous replacement equipment that is not of the In this case, stop the vehicle, check the condition must be restored so that the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate warning light is off during normal sensor is not designed for use on the necessary tire or tires to the correct driving. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a cold inflation pressure value, shown on TPMS Deactivation poor overall system performance or sensor the display or in the dedicated TPMS damage. Customers are encouraged to use menu. The TPMS can be deactivated by OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature replacing all four wheel and tire operation. TPMS Temporarily Disabled: assemblies (road tires) with wheel and Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS Check Message tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When a system fault is detected, the “Tire wheel and tire assemblies on your (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will vehicle. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then recommended that you take your vehicle to remain on solid. The system fault will also To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all your authorized dealer to have your sensor four wheel and tire assemblies (road function checked. sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provided that tires) with tires not equipped with Tire After inspecting or adjusting the tire the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. pressure always reinstall the valve stem Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from turn off when the fault condition no above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will entering the valve stem, which could chime, the "TPMS Warning Light" will damage the TPMS sensor. longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will Jamming due to electronic devices or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” driving next to facilities emitting the message and then display dashes (--) in same radio frequencies as the TPMS place of the pressure values. sensors. Beginning with the next ignition switch Installing some form of aftermarket cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or window tinting that affects radio wave display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” signals. message in the instrument cluster. 112 Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of Note: General Information the pressure values. The TPMS is not intended to replace The following regulatory statement To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four normal tire care and maintenance, or to applies to all radio frequency (RF) wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) provide warning of a tire failure or devices equipped in this vehicle: with tires equipped with TPM sensors. condition. Then, drive the vehicle for up to This device complies with Part 15 of the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The The TPMS should not be used as a FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry TPMS will chime, the "TPM Warning tire pressure gauge while adjusting your Canada. Operation is subject to the Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds tire pressure. following two conditions: and then turn off. The instrument cluster Driving on a significantly (1) This device may not cause harmful will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” underinflated tire will cause the tire to interference. message and then display pressure overheat, and can lead to tire failure. (2) This device must accept any values in place of the dashes. On the next Underinflation also reduces fuel interference received, including ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM efficiency and tire tread life, and may interference that may cause undesired SYSTEM" message will no longer be affect the vehicle’s handling and operation. displayed, as long as no system fault stopping ability. Note: Changes or modifications not exists. expressly approved by the party The TPMS is not a substitute for responsible for compliance could void the proper tire maintenance, and it is the user’s authority to operate the driver’s responsibility to maintain equipment. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light”. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

113 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. A child who is not big enough to wear 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle SYSTEMS the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to needs to be modified to accommodate a “Child Restraints” in this section for disabled person, refer to the “Customer Some of the most important safety further information) must be secured in Assistance” section for customer service features in your vehicle are the restraint the appropriate child restraint or contact information. SAFETY systems: belt-positioning booster seat in a rear Occupant Restraint Systems Features seating position. Seat Belt Systems 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in Warning! a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in Supplemental Restraint Systems the front passenger seat, move the seat (SRS) Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint in as far back as possible and use the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Child Restraints proper child restraint (Refer to “Child front air bag can cause death or serious Restraints” in this section for further injury to a child 12 years or younger, Some of the safety features described in information). including a child in a rear-facing child this section may be standard equipment restraint. on some models, or may be optional 4. Never allow children to slide the Never install a rear-facing child restraint equipment on others. If you are not sure, shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a ask an authorized dealer. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If Important Safety Precautions 5. Youshould read the instructions the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not provided with your child restraint to transport a rear-facing child restraint in Please pay close attention to the make sure that you are using it properly. that vehicle. information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 6. All occupants should always wear Seat Belt Systems properly, to keep you and your their lap and shoulder belts properly. passengers as safe as possible. Buckle up even though you are an 7. The driver and front passenger seats Here are some simple steps you can take excellent driver, even on short trips. should be moved back as far as practical Someone on the road may be a poor to minimize the risk of harm from a to allow the front air bags room to inflate. deploying air bag: driver and could cause a collision that 8. Do not lean against the door or includes you. This can happen far away 1. Children 12 years old and under window. If your vehicle has side air bags, from home or on your own street. should always ride buckled up in the rear and deployment occurs, the side air bags Research has shown that seat belts save seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. will inflate forcefully into the space lives, and they can reduce the between occupants and the door and seriousness of injuries in a collision. occupants could be injured. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking 114 the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a BeltAlert Warning Sequence the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is motor vehicle should be belted at all The BeltAlert warning sequence is recommended that pets be restrained in times. activated when the vehicle is moving the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat secured by seat belts, and cargo is System (BeltAlert) passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with properly stowed. Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Lap/Shoulder Belts Equipped) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard BeltAlert is a feature intended to All seating positions in your vehicle are front passenger seat is unoccupied). The remind the driver and outboard front equipped with lap/shoulder belts. BeltAlert warning sequence starts by seat passenger (if equipped with The seat belt webbing retractor will lock blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) only during very sudden stops or sounding an intermittent chime. Once the to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert collisions. This feature allows the BeltAlert warning sequence has feature is active whenever the ignition shoulder part of the seat belt to move completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light switch is in the AVV/START or ON/RUN freely with you under normal conditions. will remain on until the seat belts are position. However, in a collision the seat belt will buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence lock and reduce your risk of striking the Initial Indication may repeat based on vehicle speed until inside of the vehicle or being thrown out If the driver is unbuckled when the the driver and occupied outboard front of the vehicle. ignition switch is first in the AVV/START seat passenger seat belts are buckled. or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal The driver should instruct all occupants for a few seconds. If the driver or to buckle their seat belts. Warning! outboard front seat passenger (if Change of Status equipped with outboard front passenger If the driver or outboard front seat seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the Relying on the air bags alone could lead to passenger (if equipped with outboard ignition switch is first in the AVV/START more severe injuries in a collision. The air front passenger seat BeltAlert) or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt bags work with your seat belt to restrain unbuckles their seat belt while the Reminder Light will turn on and remain on you properly. In some collisions, the air bags vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat until both outboard front seat belts are sequence will begin until the seat belts belt even though you have air bags. buckled. The outboard front passenger are buckled again. seat BeltAlert is not active when an In a collision, you and your passengers can outboard front passenger seat is The outboard front passenger seat suffer much greater injuries if you are not unoccupied. BeltAlert is not active when the outboard properly buckled up. Youcan strike the front passenger seat is unoccupied. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, BeltAlert may be triggered when an or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. animal or other items are placed on the Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. outboard front passenger seat or when 115 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, A twisted seat belt may not protect you replaced immediately. Do not disassemble inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, properly. In a collision, it could even cut into or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt people riding in these areas are more likely you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your assemblies must be replaced after a to be seriously injured or killed. body, without twists. If you can’t straighten collision. a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an SAFETY Do not allow people to ride in any area of authorized dealer immediately and have it your vehicle that is not equipped with seats fixed. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating and seat belts. A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong Instructions Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap seat and using a seat belt properly. portion could ride too high on your body, 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Occupants, including the driver, should possibly causing internal injuries. Always Sit back and adjust the seat. always wear their seat belts whether or not buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the an air bag is also provided at their seating you. position to minimize the risk of severe injury back of the front seat, and next to your or death in the event of a crash. A seat belt that is too loose will not arm in the rear seat (for vehicles protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could could move too far forward, increasing the make your injuries in a collision much worse. latch plate and pull out the seat belt. possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you snugly. could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow far as necessary to allow the seat belt to these instructions to wear your seat belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is go around your lap. safely and to keep your passengers safe, dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside too. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 3. When the seat belt is long enough to increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle Two people should never be belted into a worn under the arm can cause internal until you hear a “click.” single seat belt. People belted together can injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder crash into one another in a collision, hurting bones. Wear the seat belt over your one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder shoulder so that your strongest bones will belt or a lap belt for more than one person, take the force in a collision. no matter what their size. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. Youare more likely to hit your head in a Warning! collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A lap belt worn too high can increase the A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt in a collision and leave you with no forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic 06046V0001NA protection. Inspect the seat belt system bones, but across your abdomen. Always Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as Belt Buckle loose parts. Damaged parts must be possible and keep it snug. 116 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the As a guide, if you are shorter than and lies low across your hips, below your folded webbing. The folded webbing average, you will prefer the shoulder belt abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt must enter the slot at the top of the latch anchorage in a lower position, and if you portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To plate. are taller than average, you will prefer the loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up position. After you release the anchorage seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under until it clears the folded webbing and the button, try to move it up or down to make the seat belt in a collision. seat belt is no longer twisted. sure that it is locked in position. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Note: The adjustable upper shoulder belt shoulder and chest with minimal, if any Anchorage anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up slack so that it is comfortable and not feature. This feature allows the shoulder resting on your neck. The retractor will In the driver and outboard front belt anchorage to be adjusted in the withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. passenger seats, the top of the shoulder upward position without pushing or belt can be adjusted upward or squeezing the release button. To verify 6. To release the seat belt, push the red downward to position the seat belt away the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, button on the buckle. The seat belt will from your neck. Push or squeeze the pull downward on the shoulder belt automatically retract to its stowed anchorage button to release the anchorage until it is locked into position. position. If necessary, slide the latch anchorage, and move it up or down to the plate down the webbing to allow the seat position that serves you best. belt to retract fully. Warning! Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. Use the following procedure to untwist a Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you twisted lap/shoulder belt. could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as safely and to keep your passengers safe, possible to the anchor point. too. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack above the latch plate, grasp and twist the 0502143373US so that it is comfortable and not resting on seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt your neck. The retractor will withdraw any a fold that begins immediately above the Anchorage slack in the shoulder belt. latch plate. Adjustable Anchorage Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. 117 Always make all seat belt height Pretensioners work for all size adjustments when the vehicle is stationary. occupants, including those in child restraints. Note: These devices are not a substitute Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

SAFETY for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). 16086V0101NA Like the air bags, the pretensioners are ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking single use items. A deployed Retractor pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used Energy Management Feature 0226075266 for normal usage, only pull the seat belt Pregnant Women And Seat Belts The front outboard seat belt system is webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section Seat belts must be worn by all occupants equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR including pregnant women: the risk of is activated, you will hear a clicking sound injury in the event of an accident is risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor as the seat belt retracts. Allow the reduced for the mother and the unborn webbing to retract completely in this child if they are wearing a seat belt. assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. case and then carefully pull out only the Position the lap belt snug and low below amount of webbing necessary to the abdomen and across the strong Switchable Automatic Locking comfortably wrap around the occupant’s bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt Retractors (ALR) mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the across the chest and away from the neck. buckle until you hear a "click." Never place the shoulder belt behind the The seat belts in the passenger seating In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder back or under the arm. positions are equipped with a Switchable belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which Seat Belt Pretensioner belt will still retract to remove any slack is used to secure a child restraint system. in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic The front outboard seat belt system is For additional information, refer to Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is equipped with pretensioning devices that “Installing Child Restraints Using The installed in a seating position that has a are designed to remove slack from the Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child seat belt with this feature. Children seat belt in the event of a collision. These Restraints” section of this manual. The 12 years old and under should always be devices may improve the performance of figure below illustrates the locking properly restrained in the rear seat of a the seat belt by removing slack from the feature for each seating position. vehicle with a rear seat. seat belt early in a collision. 118 How To Disengage The Automatic Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the Locking Mode internal circuits and interconnecting Warning! Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder wiring associated with the electrical Air belt and allow it to retract completely to Bag System Components. Yourvehicle Never place a rear-facing child restraint in disengage the Automatic Locking Mode may be equipped with the following Air front of an air bag. A deploying passenger and activate the vehicle sensitive Bag System Components: front air bag can cause death or serious (emergency) locking mode. injury to a child 12 years or younger, Air Bag System Components including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Warning! Never install a rear-facing child restraint Air Bag Warning Light in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Steering Wheel and Column rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If The seat belt assembly must be replaced the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not if the switchable Automatic Locking Instrument Panel transport a rear-facing child restraint in Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat that vehicle. belt function is not working properly when Knee Impact Bolsters checked according to the procedures in the Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Service Manual. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Seat Belt Buckle Switch Mode Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Supplemental Side Air Bags 1. Buckle the combination lap and Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Knee Air Bags shoulder belt. to restrain occupants who are wearing the 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull seat belt or children who are using booster Front and Side Impact Sensors downward until the entire seat belt is seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child Seat Belt Pretensioners extracted. restraints that have a harness for Seat Track Position Sensors 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the restraining the child. seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking Air Bag Warning Light sound. This indicates the seat belt is now Supplemental Restraint Systems in the Automatic Locking Mode. (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in The ORC monitors the readiness of the this section may be standard equipment electronic parts of the air bag system on some models, or may be optional whenever the ignition switch is in the equipment on others. If you are not sure, START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition ask an authorized dealer. switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant 119 position, the air bag system is not on and The Air Bag Warning Light comes on you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning the air bags will not inflate. intermittently or remains on while Light has come on and a fault has been The ORC contains a backup power supply driving. detected. If the Redundant Air Bag system that may deploy the air bag Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an SAFETY system even if the battery loses power or or any engine related gauges are not it becomes disconnected prior to working, the Occupant Restraint authorized dealer service the vehicle deployment. Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In immediately. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning this condition the air bags may not be For additional information regarding the Light in the instrument panel for ready to inflate for your protection. Have Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to approximately four to eight seconds for a an authorized dealer service the air bag “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” self-check when the ignition switch is system immediately. section of this manual. first in the ON/RUN position. After the Front Air Bags self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction Warning! This vehicle has front air bags and in any part of the system, it turns on the lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and Air Bag Warning Light, either front passenger. The front air bags are a momentarily or continuously. A single Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your supplement to the seat belt restraint chime will sound to alert you if the light instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a systems. The driver front air bag is comes on again after initial startup. collision. If the light does not come on as a mounted in the center of the steering The ORC also includes diagnostics that bulb check when the ignition is first turned wheel. The passenger front air bag is will illuminate the instrument panel Air on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if mounted in the instrument panel, above Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is it comes on as you drive, have an authorized the glove compartment. The words “SRS detected that could affect the air bag dealer service the air bag system AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on system. The diagnostics also record the immediately. the air bag covers. nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be Redundant Air Bag Warning Light maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is come on during the four to eight seconds detected, which could affect the when the ignition switch is first in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), ON/RUN position. the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The The Air Bag Warning Light remains on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will after the four to eight-second interval. stay on until the fault is cleared. In 06106V0001EM addition, a single chime will sound to alert Driver Front Air Bag 120 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other 06106V0002EM 06096V0103NA system components. Passenger Front Air Bag Passenger Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster Location The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low Warning! energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. Being too close to the steering wheel or This vehicle may be equipped with a instrument panel during front air bag driver and/or front passenger seat belt deployment could cause serious injury, buckle switch that detects whether the including death. Air bags need room to driver or front passenger seat belt is inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may instrument panel. adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. 06096V0102NA Never place a rear-facing child restraint Driver Knee Air Bag Location/Knee in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger This vehicle may be equipped with driver Bolster Location front air bag can cause death or serious and/or front passenger seat track injury to a child 12 years or younger, position sensors that may adjust the including a child in a rear-facing child inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air restraint. Bags based upon seat position. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. 121 On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may Warning! Warning! deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a No objects should be placed over or near severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee SAFETY the air bag on the instrument panel or Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way. steering wheel because any such objects deceleration over time, vehicle speed and could cause harm if the vehicle is in a Do not mount any accessories to the knee damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights, collision severe enough to cause the air bag indicators of whether or not an air bag to inflate. stereos, citizen band radios, etc. should have deployed. Do not put anything on or around the air Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front bag covers or attempt to open them protection in all collisions, and also are manually. Youmay damage the air bags and Passenger Knee Air Bags you could be injured because the air bags needed to help keep you in position, away may no longer be functional. The protective from an inflating air bag. This vehicle is equipped with a covers for the air bag cushions are designed When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag to open only when the air bags are inflating. requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below Relying on the air bags alone could lead to inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental more severe injuries in a collision. The air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the bags work with your seat belt to restrain front air bags. instrument panel below the glove you properly. In some collisions, air bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and compartment. The Supplemental Knee won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat the upper passenger side of the Air Bags provide enhanced protection belts even though you have air bags. instrument panel separate and fold out of during a frontal impact by working the way as the air bags inflate to their full together with the seat belts, Front Air Bag Operation size. The front air bags fully inflate in less pretensioners, and front air bags. time than it takes to blink your eyes. The Front Air Bags are designed to provide front air bags then quickly deflate while Supplemental Side Air Bags additional protection by supplementing helping to restrain the driver and front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air the seat belts. Front air bags are not passenger. Bags (SABs) expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front Knee Impact Bolsters This vehicle is equipped with air bags will not deploy in all frontal Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air collisions, including some that may The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect Bags (SABs). produce substantial vehicle damage — the knees of the driver and front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air for example, some pole collisions, truck passenger, and position the front Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard underrides, and angle offset collisions. occupants for improved interaction with side of the front seats. The SABs are the front air bags. marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” 122 on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard occupants in certain side outboard side of the seats. impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! The SABs may help to reduce the risk of reduction potential provided by the seat occupant injury during certain side belts and body structure. impacts, in addition to the injury Do not use accessory seat covers or place The SABIC deploys downward, covering reduction potential provided by the seat objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC belts and body structure. the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window. you, causing serious injury. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. 06106V0004EM Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or Air Bag “AIRBAG.” Warning! When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s Do not mount equipment, or stack trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys luggage or other cargo up high enough to through the seat seam into the space block the deployment of the SABICs. The between the occupant and the door. The trim covering above the side windows where SAB moves at a very high speed and with the SABIC and its deployment path are such a high force that it could injure located should remain free from any occupants if they are not seated obstructions. properly, or if items are positioned in the In order for the SABICs to work as area where the SAB inflates. Children are intended, do not install any accessory items at an even greater risk of injury from a 06106V0005EM in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do deploying air bag. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) SABICs may help reduce the risk of head for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. 123 Side Impacts Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could The Side Air Bags are designed to Warning! lead to more severe injuries in a collision. activate in certain side impacts. The The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Occupants, including children, who are up Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always

SAFETY determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. event is appropriate, based on the seriously injured or killed. Occupants, severity and type of collision. The side including children, should never lean on or impact sensors aid the ORC in sleep against the door, side windows, or Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious area where the side air bags inflate, even if determining the appropriate response to they are in an infant or child restraint. in the interior trim, but they will open impact events. The system is calibrated during air bag deployment. to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact Seat belts (and child restraints where Rollover Events side of the vehicle during impacts that appropriate) are necessary for your require Side Air Bag occupant protection. protection in all collisions. They also help Side Air Bags are designed to activate in keep you in position, away from an inflating certain rollover events. The ORC In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy Side Air Bag. To get the best protection independently; a left side impact deploys determines whether the deployment of from the Side Air Bags, occupants must the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover the left Side Air Bags only and a wear their seat belts properly and sit right-side impact deploys the right Side upright with their backs against the seats. event is appropriate, based on the Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is Children must be properly restrained in a severity and type of collision. Vehicle not a good indicator of whether or not child restraint or booster seat that is damage by itself is not a good indicator Side Air Bags should have deployed. appropriate for the size of the child. of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing at certain angles, or some side collisions Warning! that do not impact the area of the system determines if a rollover event passenger compartment. The Side Air may be in progress and whether Bags may deploy during angled or offset Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not deployment is appropriate. In the event frontal collisions where the front air bags lean against the door or window. Sit upright the vehicle experiences a rollover or near deploy. in the center of the seat. rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover Side Air Bags are a supplement to the Being too close to the Side Air Bags sensing system will also deploy the seat seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be belt pretensioners on both sides of the deploy in less time than it takes to blink severely injured or killed. vehicle. your eyes. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. 124 Air Bag System Components The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller Warning! (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and the occupants as the air bags deploy and interconnecting wiring associated with unfold. The abrasions are similar to electrical Air Bag System Components friction rope burns or those you might get Deployed air bags and seat belt listed below: sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. pretensioners cannot protect you in another They are not caused by contact with collision. Have the air bags, seat belt Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) chemicals. They are not permanent and pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer Air Bag Warning Light normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few immediately. Also, have the Occupant Steering Wheel and Column days, or if you have any blistering, see Restraint Controller System serviced as well. Instrument Panel your doctor immediately. Knee Impact Bolsters As the air bags deflate, you may see Note: some smoke-like particles. The particles Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags are a normal by-product of the process Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open Seat Belt Buckle Switch that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles during air bag deployment. Supplemental Side Air Bags may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or After any collision, the vehicle should Supplemental Knee Air Bags throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, be taken to an authorized dealer rinse the area with cool water. For nose immediately. Front and Side Impact Sensors or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If Seat Belt Pretensioners the irritation continues, see your doctor. Enhanced Accident Response If these particles settle on your clothing, Seat Track Position Sensors follow the garment manufacturer’s System instructions for cleaning. In the event of an impact, if the If A Deployment Occurs Do not drive your vehicle after the air communication network remains intact, The front air bags are designed to deflate bags have deployed. If you are involved in and the power remains intact, depending immediately after deployment. another collision, the air bags will not be on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Note: Front and/or side air bags will not in place to protect you. Accident Response System perform the deploy in all collisions. This does not following functions: mean something is wrong with the air bag system. Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) If you do have a collision which deploys Cut off battery power to the electric the air bags, any or all of the following motor (If Equipped) may occur: 125 Flash hazard lights as long as the –Automatic transmission gear battery has power selector Turn on the interior lights, which –Horn remain on as long as the battery has –Front wiper SAFETY power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident –Headlamp washer pump Response System. Note: After an accident, remember to Unlock the power door locks. cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key Yourvehicle may also be designed to from the ignition switch to avoid draining perform any of these other functions in the battery. Carefully check the vehicle response to the Enhanced Accident for fuel leaks in the engine compartment Response System: and on the ground near the engine Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off compartment and fuel tank before the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC resetting the system and starting the Circulation Door engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices Cut off battery power to the: (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset –Engine the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, –Electric Motor (if equipped) contact an authorized dealer. –Electric power steering –Brake booster –Electric park brake

126 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed Right turn light is OFF. in Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 127 Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

SAFETY 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System Do not attempt to modify any part of your performed. The EDR is designed to air bag system. The air bag may inflate record data related to vehicle dynamics accidentally or may not function properly if and safety systems for a short period of Warning! modifications are made. Take your vehicle time, typically 30 seconds or less. The to an authorized dealer for any air bag EDR in this vehicle is designed to record system service. If your seat, including your such data as: Modifications to any part of the air bag trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced system could cause it to fail when you need in any way (including removal or How various systems in your vehicle it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system loosening/tightening of seat attachment were operating; is not there to protect you. Do not modify bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Whether or not the driver and the components or wiring, including adding passenger safety belts were any kind of badges or stickers to the accessories may be used. If it is necessary steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper to modify the air bag system for persons buckled/fastened; passenger side of the instrument panel. Do with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. How far (if at all) the driver was not modify the front bumper, vehicle body depressing the accelerator and/or brake structure, or add aftermarket side steps or pedal; and, running boards. Event Data Recorder (EDR) It is dangerous to try to repair any part of How fast the vehicle was traveling. the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell This vehicle is equipped with an event These data can help provide a better anyone who works on your vehicle that it data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of understanding of the circumstances in has an air bag system. an EDR is to record, in certain crash or which crashes and injuries occur. near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems 128 Note: EDR data are recorded by your Children 12 years or younger should ride Before buying any restraint system, vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation properly buckled up in a rear seat, if make sure that it has a label certifying occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR available. According to crash statistics, that it meets all applicable Safety under normal driving conditions and no children are safer when properly Standards. Youshould also make sure personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, restrained in the rear seats rather than in that you can install it in the vehicle where and crash location) are recorded. the front. you will use it. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR Note: Warning! data with the type of personally For additional information, refer to identifying data routinely acquired during http://www.nhtsa.gov/ a crash investigation. In a collision, an unrestrained child can parents-and-caregivers or call: To read data recorded by an EDR, special become a projectile inside the vehicle. The 1–888–327–4236 equipment is required, and access to the force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not Canadian residents should refer to vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition Transport Canada’s website for to the vehicle manufacturer, other hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or additional information: http:// parties, such as law enforcement, that killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ have the special equipment, can read the be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. motorvehiclesafety/ information if they have access to the safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm vehicle or the EDR. There are different sizes and types of Child Restraints restraints for children from newborn size Everyone in your vehicle needs to be to the child almost large enough for an buckled up at all times, including babies adult safety belt. Always check the child and children. Every state in the United seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you States, and every Canadian province, have the correct seat for your child. requires that small children ride in proper Carefully read and follow all the restraint systems. This is the law, and you instructions and warnings in the child can be prosecuted for ignoring it. restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

129 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

SAFETY Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the limits of their child restraint vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints do, so they can be used rear-facing by Never install a rear-facing child restraint children who have outgrown their infant in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Safety experts recommend that children carrier but are still less than at least two rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they years old. Children should remain the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not are two years old or until they reach rear-facing until they reach the highest transport a rear-facing child restraint in either the height or weight limit of their weight or height allowed by their that vehicle. rear-facing child restraint. Two types of convertible child seat. child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. Warning! The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the Never place a rear-facing child restraint weight or height limit of the infant carrier. in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Convertible child seats can be used either front air bag can cause death or serious rear-facing or forward-facing in the injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child vehicle. Convertible child seats often restraint. have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers 130 Older Children And Child Restraints After a child restraint is installed in the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat possible, touching the child’s thighs and Children who are two years old or who forward or rearward because it can loosen not the stomach? have outgrown their rear-facing the child restraint attachments. Remove the convertible child seat can ride child restraint before adjusting the vehicle 5. Can the child stay seated like this for forward-facing in the vehicle. seat position. When the vehicle seat has the whole trip? Forward-facing child seats and been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. If the answer to any of these questions convertible child seats used in the When your child restraint is not in use, was “no,” then the child still needs to use a forward-facing direction are for children secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is who are over two years old or who have LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat outgrown the rear-facing weight or vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In belt fit periodically and make sure the height limit of their rear-facing a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s convertible child seat. Children should occupants or seatbacks and cause serious squirming or slouching can move the belt remain in a forward-facing child seat with personal injury. out of position. If the shoulder belt a harness for as long as possible, up to contacts the face or neck, move the child the highest weight or height allowed by Children Too Large For Booster closer to the center of the vehicle, or use the child seat. Seats a booster seat to position the seat belt All children whose weight or height is on the child correctly. above the forward-facing limit for the Children who are large enough to wear child seat should use a belt-positioning the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts legs are long enough to bend over the Warning! fit properly. If the child cannot sit with front of the seat when their back is knees bent over the vehicle’s seat against the seatback, should use the seat Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt cushion while the child’s back is against belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the seatback, they should use a test to decide whether the child can use the shoulder belt will not protect a child belt-positioning booster seat. The child the vehicle’s seat belt alone: properly, which may result in serious injury or and belt-positioning booster seat are death. A child must always wear both the lap held in the vehicle by the seat belt. 1. Can the child sit all the way back and shoulder portions of the seat belt against the back of the vehicle seat? correctly.

Warning! 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the loose in a collision. The child could be badly child’s shoulder between the neck and injured or killed. Follow the child restraint arm? manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 131 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight of

SAFETY LATCH – Lower Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

Lower Anchors And Tethers For located at the back of the seat cushion LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System where it meets the seatback and one top Restraints In This Vehicle tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top 022668173 tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Label restraint. Please see the following table Yourvehicle is equipped with the child for more information. 06086V0101NA restraint anchorage system called LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child TopTether Anchorage Symbol seats. There are two lower anchorages 132 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the What is the weight limit (child’s weight + combined weight of the child and the child weight of the child restraint) for using the restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH anchorage system to attach the child and tether anchor instead of the LATCH restraint? system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. be used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a position using the inner LATCH lower No child seat in the center seating position. anchorage? Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower Can two child restraints be attached using a No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child common lower LATCH anchorage? seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your back of the front passenger seat? child restraint owner’s manual for more information. All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes restraint. See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.

133 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Center Seat LATCH The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the Warning!

SAFETY seat cushion where it meets the seatback. Each anchorage is Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. under a cover with the This position is not approved for installing anchorage symbol on it. child seats using the LATCH attachments. Lift the cover to access the lower Youmust use the seat belt and tether anchorage. 0502135677US anchor to install a child seat in the center Tether Strap Anchorage Locations seating position. 3 — Tether Strap Anchorages Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible LATCH-compatible child restraint Child Restraint” for typical installation systems will be equipped with a rigid bar instructions. or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the Always follow the directions of the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the child restraint manufacturer when connection to the anchorage. installing your child restraint. Not all Forward-facing child restraints and some child restraint systems will be installed 06086V0009NA rear-facing child restraints will also be as described here. LATCH Anchorage Locations equipped with a tether strap. The tether 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar strap will have a hook at the end to attach To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations to the top tether anchorage and a way to Restraint tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. If the selected seating position has a Locating The Upper Tether Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Anchorages (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the There are tether strap section “Installing Child Restraints Using anchorages behind each the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type rear seating position of seat belt each seating position has. located on the back of the seat. 134 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is Child restraint anchorages are designed straps and on the tether strap of the child installed tightly by pulling back and forth to withstand only those loads imposed by seat so that you can more easily attach on the child seat at the belt path. It should correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no the hooks or connectors to the vehicle not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in circumstances are they to be used for adult anchorages. any direction. seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 2. Place the child seat between the How To Stow An Unused lower anchorages for that seating Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: position. For some second row seats, you Installing Child Restraints Using may need to recline the seat and / or raise When using the LATCH attaching system The Vehicle Seat Belt the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a to install a child restraint, stow all ALR Child restraint systems are designed to better fit. If the rear seat can be moved seat belts that are not being used by be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or forward and rearward in the vehicle, you other occupants or being used to secure the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. may wish to move it to its rear-most child restraints. An unused belt could position to make room for the child seat. injure a child if they play with it and Youmay also move the front seat accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Warning! forward to allow more room for the child Before installing a child restraint using seat. the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the Improper installation or failure to 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt properly secure a child restraint can lead to of the child restraint to the lower failure of the restraint. The child could be interferes with the child restraint anchorages in the selected seating badly injured or killed. installation, instead of buckling it behind position. the child restraint, route the seat belt Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 4. If the child restraint has a tether through the child restraint belt path and directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. strap, connect it to the top tether then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. anchorage. See the section “Installing Remind all children in the vehicle that the Child Restraints Using the TopTether seat belts are not toys and that they Anchorage” for directions to attach a should not play with them. tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push Warning! the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint Improper installation of a child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 135 The seat belts in the passenger seating Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For positions are equipped with a Switchable description in “Switchable Automatic Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that Locking Retractors (ALR)” under Vehicle is designed to keep the lap portion of the “Occupant Restraint Systems” for seat belt tight around the child restraint additional information on ALR. SAFETY so that it is not necessary to use a locking Please see the table below and the clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” following sections for more information. into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is

pulled back into the retractor. 16086V0101NA Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to Weight limit of the restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the Child Restraint attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also front passenger seat? allows contact. All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes installation of the child restraint. See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an No against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor. 136 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Warning! retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking Do not attach a tether strap for a sound. This means the seat belt is now in rear-facing car seat to any location in front Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. of the car seat, including the seat frame or a properly secure a child restraint can lead to tether anchorage. Only attach the tether failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing System” for the location of approved tether to tighten the lap portion around the child anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear 8. If the child restraint has a top tether seat can be moved forward and rearward strap and the seating position has a top in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to tether anchorage, connect the tether its rear-most position to make room for strap to the anchorage and tighten the the child seat. Youmay also move the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the TopTether 1. Look behind the seating position front seat forward to allow more room where you plan to install the child for the child seat. Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing Youmay need to move the seat forward from the retractor to pass it through the 9. Test that the child restraint is to provide better access to the tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether twist the belt webbing in the belt path. on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage for that seating position, not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 137 2. Route the tether strap to provide the Transporting Pets most direct path for the strap between Warning! Air Bags deploying in the front seat could the anchor and the child seat. If your harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear thrown about and possibly injured, or head restraints, raise the head restraint, An incorrectly anchored tether strap SAFETY injure a passenger during panic braking or and where possible, route the tether could lead to increased head motion and in a collision. strap under the head restraint and possible injury to the child. Use only the between the two posts. If not possible, anchorage position directly behind the child Pets should be restrained in the rear seat lower the head restraint and pass the seat to secure a child restraint top tether (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet tether strap around the outboard side of strap. carriers that are secured by seat belts. the head restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the slip into the opening between the seatbacks child restraint to the top tether as you remove slack in the strap. anchorage as shown in the diagram. Center Tether Special Instructions Center Tether Attachment: 1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full down position. 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the 0502135677US child restraint to the center tether Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting anchorage located on the back of the 3 — Tether Strap Anchorages seat. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. manufacturer’s instructions.

138 SAFETY TIPS If you are required to drive with the Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside The Vehicle Transporting Passengers trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. Seat Belts THE CARGO AREA. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. with the engine running, adjust your heating Damaged parts must be replaced Warning! or cooling controls to force outside air into immediately. Do not disassemble or the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. modify the system. Do not leave children or animals inside Front seat belt assemblies must be parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The best protection against carbon replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt build-up may cause serious injury or death. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a assemblies must be replaced after a properly maintained engine exhaust collision if they have been damaged (i.e., It is extremely dangerous to ride in a system. bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are Whenever a change is noticed in the there is any question regarding seat belt more likely to be seriously injured or killed. sound of the exhaust system, when or retractor condition, replace the seat exhaust fumes can be detected inside the belt. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats vehicle, or when the underside or rear of Air Bag Warning Light and seat belts. the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust The Air Bag warning light will turn on Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a system and adjacent body areas for for four to eight seconds as a bulb check seat and using a seat belt properly. broken, damaged, deteriorated, or when the ignition switch is first turned to mispositioned parts. Open seams or ON/RUN. If the light is either not on Exhaust Gas loose connections could permit exhaust during starting, stays on, or turns on while fumes to seep into the passenger driving, have the system inspected at an compartment. In addition, inspect the authorized dealer as soon as possible. Warning! exhaust system each time the vehicle is After the bulb check, this light will raised for lubrication or oil change. illuminate with a single chime when a Replace as required. fault with the Air Bag System has been Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain detected. It will stay on until the fault is carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and removed. If the light comes on odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. intermittently or remains on while To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety driving, have an authorized dealer service tips: the vehicle immediately. Do not run the engine in a closed garage Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in or in confined areas any longer than needed “Safety” for further information. to move your vehicle in or out of the area. 139 Defroster ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR If the vehicle carpet has been removed MATFROM THE VEHICLE before and re-installed, always properly attach Check operation by selecting the defrost installing any other floor mat. NEVER install carpet to the floor and check the floor mat mode and place the blower control on or stack an additional floor mat on top of an fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. high speed. Youshould be able to feel the existing floor mat. Fully depress each pedal to check for SAFETY air directed against the windshield. See interference with the accelerator, brake, or an authorized dealer for service if your ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that defroster is inoperable. cannot be properly attached and secured to It is recommended to only use mild soap Floor Mat Safety Information your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be and water to clean your floor mats. After replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat cleaning, always check your floor mat has Always use floor mats designed to fit for the specific make, model, and year of been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that your vehicle. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. does not interfere with the operation of ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. the driver’s side floor area. To check for Only use a floor mat that is securely interference, with the vehicle properly Periodic Safety Checks YouShould attached using the floor mat fasteners so parked with the engine off, fully depress the Make Outside The Vehicle it cannot slip out of position and interfere accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal with the accelerator, brake or clutch (if present) to check for interference. If your Tires floor mat interferes with the operation of pedals or impair safe operation of your any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, Examine tires for excessive tread wear vehicle in other ways. remove the floor mat from the vehicle and and uneven wear patterns. Check for place the floor mat in your trunk. stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect Warning! ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area. the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or slide into the driver’s side floor area when Check the wheel nuts for tightness. stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the vehicle is moving. Objects can become Check the tires (including spare) for fasteners may cause your floor mat to trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch proper cold inflation pressure. interfere with the accelerator, brake, or pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. Lights control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or Have someone observe the operation of DEATH: NEVER place any objects under the floor ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects brake lights and exterior lights while you mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT could change the position of the floor mat work the controls. Check turn signal and install your floor mat upside down or turn and may cause interference with the high beam indicator lights on the your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. instrument panel. mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. 140 Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

141 This page is intentionally left blank

142 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 144 see how you can explore its fullest ENGINE BLOCK HEATER potential. We’ll look at how to drive — IF EQUIPPED ...... 147 safely in any situation, making it a ENGINE BREAK-IN welcome companion with our comfort RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 147 and wallets in mind. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 148 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....150 ALFA DNA SELECTOR ...... 156 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 159 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 159 SPEED LIMITER ...... 161 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 162 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 164 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM ...... 171 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM ...... 176 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ...... 179 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 181 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 183 TRAILER TOWING ...... 184 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....191

143 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a adjust the seat, the interior rear view start from a booster battery or the battery mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to NEUTRAL (N). “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the Caution! display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! continuously crank the engine for more than procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove authorized dealer. the key fob from the vehicle and lock your STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. Remote Starting System This system uses the key fob to start the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least 300 reasons. A child or others could be seriously into the throttle body air inlet opening in an feet (91 meters). or fatally injured. Children should be warned attempt to start the vehicle. This could The remote starting system also not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal result in flash fire causing serious personal activates the climate control (if or the transmission gear selector. injury. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if vehicle, or in a location accessible to vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures children. A child could operate power with an automatic transmission cannot be outside and inside of the vehicle. started this way. Unburned fuel could enter windows, other controls, or move the Note: Obstructions between the vehicle vehicle. the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the and key fob may reduce this range. Do not leave children or animals inside converter and vehicle. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

144 How To Use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Extended Park Starting Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be If the vehicle has not been started or met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the driven for at least 90 days, it is advisable outside ambient temperature is less than Gear selector in PARK (P). to follow the indications below. 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer To start the engine, proceed as follows: Doors closed. will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume previous operation, except if the Hood closed. 1. Briefly push the ignition button Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. 2. If the engine does not start, wait five Liftgate closed. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and seconds and let the starter cool down and operation will continue. Hazard switch off. then repeat the starting procedure Cold Weather Operation Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not 3. If the engine does not start after eight pressed). To prevent possible engine damage while attempts, let the starter cool down for at Battery at an acceptable charge level. starting at low temperatures, this vehicle least 10 seconds, and then repeat the will inhibit engine cranking when the starting procedure PANIC button not pushed. ambient temperature is less than –22° F If the problem persists, contact your (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor System not disabled from previous authorized dealer. remote start event. reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externally- Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, Vehicle alarm system indicator powered electric engine block heater is very difficult starting, that can be noticed flashing. available as optional equipment or from through rapid fatigue of the starter, your authorized dealer. might also be due to a partially flat Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped battery. In this case, refer to "Jump The message “plug in engine heater” will with keyless ignition system). Starting" in "In Case Of Emergency". be displayed in the instrument cluster Fuel level meets minimum when the ambient temperature is below If Engine Fails To Start requirement. 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is Starting the Engine with Key Fob shut off as a reminder to avoid possible Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Battery Run Down or Drained crank delays at the next cold start. Equipped If the ignition does not respond when the When Remote Start is activated, the button is pushed, the key fob battery heated steering wheel and driver heated Caution! might be run down or drained. Therefore, seat features will automatically turn on in the system does not detect the presence cold weather. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will Use of the recommended oil and adhering to These features will stay on through the the prescribed oil change intervals is display a dedicated message. duration of remote start until the ignition important to prevent engine damage and In this case, follow the instructions is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. ensure satisfactory starting in cold outlined in "Starting With A Discharged conditions. Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know 145 YourVehicle" chapter, and start the After Starting — Warming Up The inform about the absence of the key on engine normally. Engine board, only if the doors are closed. Proceed as follows: Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON to the STOP position) the accessories are Warning! Travel slowly, letting the engine run at still powered for about three minutes, or a reduced RPM, without accelerating until a door is opened. suddenly. Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF into the throttle body air inlet opening in an It is recommended to wait until the mode, the window switches remain active attempt to start the vehicle. This could digital engine coolant temperature for three minutes. Opening a front door result in flash fire causing serious personal indicator starts to rise for maximum will cancel this function. injury. performance. After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine Do not attempt to push or tow your Stopping The Engine vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped compartment to cool before shutting off with an automatic transmission cannot be To stop the engine, proceed as follows: the engine. started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is Turbocharger Cool Down STARTING AND OPERATING has started, ignite and damage the not dangerous for oncoming traffic. It is recommended before switching the converter and vehicle. 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a If the vehicle has a discharged battery, few minutes so that the turbocharger can booster cables may be used to obtain a 3. With engine idling, push the be suitably lubricated. This procedure is start from a booster battery or the battery START/STOP button on the steering particularly recommended after severe in another vehicle. This type of start can be wheel to STOP the engine. driving. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON After a full load operation, keep the for further information. mode when the engine is off. engine idling for three to five minutes To shut off the engine with vehicle speed before switching it off. greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must This time allows the lubricating oil and Caution! push and hold the ignition or push the the engine coolant to eliminate the START/STOP button three times excessive heat from combustion consecutively within a few seconds. The chamber, bearings, inner components and To prevent damage to the starter, do not engine will shut down, and the ignition will turbocharger. continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds be placed in the ON mode before trying again. With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to go away from the vehicle taking the key fob with you, without the engine switching off. The vehicle will 146 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF Note: ENGINE BREAK-IN EQUIPPED The engine block heater cord is a RECOMMENDATIONS The engine block heater warms the factory installed option. If your vehicle is 2.0L GME T4 Engine Break-In engine and permits quicker starts in cold not equipped, heater cords are available For vehicles equipped with the 2.0L weather. from your authorized dealer. GME T4, use the following engine Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC The engine block heater will require break-in recommendations: electrical outlet with a grounded, 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate Despite modern technology and World three-wire extension cord. the heater element. Class Manufacturing methods, the For ambient temperatures below 0°F The engine block heater must be moving parts of the engine must still (-18°C), the engine block heater is plugged in at least 1 hour to have a wear in with each other. This wearing in recommended. For ambient warming effect on the engine and at occurs mainly during the first 500 miles temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the least 4 hours to have a warming effect (805 km) and continues through the first engine block heater is required. when ambient temperatures are below oil change interval. The engine block heater cord is routed -20 F (-29 C) Note: A new engine may consume some under the hood, behind to the driver’s oil during its first few thousand miles side headlamp. Follow the steps below to (kilometers) of operation. This should be properly use the engine block heater: Warning! considered a normal part of the break-in 1. Locate the engine block heater cord period and not interpreted as an (access door on the passenger side wiper Remember to disconnect the engine block indication of a problem. Please monitor cowl). heater cord before driving. Damage to the your oil level during the break-in period 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause and add oil as required. 2. Pull the cord to the front of the electrocution. It is recommended for the operator to vehicle and plug it into a grounded, observe the following driving behaviors three-wire extension cord. during the new vehicle break-in period: 3. After the vehicle is running, properly 0to100miles(0to160km): stow away behind access door on the Do not allow the engine to operate at passenger side wiper cowl. idle for an extended period of time. Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration. Avoid aggressive braking. Drive with the engine speed less than 3500 RPM. 147 Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic (88 km) and observe local speed limits. The vehicle is equipped with electric park Parking Brake". 100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km): brake to guarantee better use and In addition to engaging the electric park optimal performance compared to a brake, along with steering and positioning Press the accelerator pedal slowly and manually operated park brake. chocks in front of the wheels (when on a not more than halfway to avoid rapid The electric parking brake features a steep slope), you must always place the acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before gears). switch located on the center console, a caliper with motor for each rear wheel, leaving. Avoid aggressive braking. and an electronic control module. Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery must be replaced in order to Drive with the engine speed less than unlock the electric park brake. 5000 RPM. Engaging The Park Brake Manually Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed Briefly pull the switch located on the limits. center console to manually engage the electric park brake when the vehicle is 300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km): STARTING AND OPERATING stationary. Exercise the full engine rpm range, Noise may be heard from the rear of the shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) vehicle when engaging the electric at higher rpm’s when possible. parking brake. 07046S0001EM A slight movement of the brake pedal Do not perform sustained operation Electric Park Brake Switch with the accelerator pedal at wide open may be detected when engaging the throttle. The electric parking brake can be electric parking brake with the brake engaged in two ways: pedal pressed. Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph With the electric parking brake engaged, (136 km/h) and observe local speed Manually, by pulling the switch on the the BRAKE warning light on the limits. center console. instrument panel and the switch will For the first 1500 miles (2414 km): Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto illuminate. Park Brake" conditions. Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities Note: Normally, the electric parking during the first 1500 miles (2414 km). brake is engaged automatically when the engine is stopped. This function can be Note: Monitor engine oil with every deactivated/activated on the refueling and add if necessary. Oil and Information and Entertainment system fuel consumption may be higher through by selecting the following items in the first oil change interval. sequence on the main menu: "Settings", 148 Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Do not leave the key fob in or near the Manually Caution! vehicle or in a location accessible to In order to manually release the park children. A child could operate power brake, the ignition should be in the ON windows, other controls, or move the With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then vehicle. warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly. before driving; failure to do so can lead to this case the driver is responsible for brake brake failure and a collision. activation and vehicle parking in complete Noise may be heard from the rear of the safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the Always fully apply the park brake when brake pedal may be detected during leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause disengagement. damage or injury. If, under exceptional circumstances, the After disengaging the electric parking use of the brake is required with the brake, the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the Note: Always engage the electric instrument panel and the light on the center console pulled as long as the brake parking brake when parking the vehicle to switch will turn off. action is necessary. prevent injury or damage caused by the If the BRAKE warning light on the unexpected movement of the vehicle. The BRAKE warning light may turn on instrument panel remains on with the with the hydraulic system temporarily Note: Never use gear position PARK (P) electric parking brake disengaged, this unavailable; in this case, braking is instead of the electric parking brake. indicates a fault: in this case, contact an controlled by the motors. authorized dealer. Electric Park Brake Operating Modes The brake lights will also automatically The electric park brake may operate as turn on in the same way as normal braking follows: with the use of the brake pedal. Warning! Release the switch on the center console "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode to stop the braking action with the is activated by pulling the switch vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or repeatedly while driving. with access to an unlocked vehicle. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is "Static Engagement and Release braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept unattended is dangerous for a number of electric park brake can be activated by pulled, the park brake will definitively reasons. A child or others could be seriously pulling the switch on the center console engage. or fatally injured. Children should be warned once. Push the switch and the brake pedal not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector. at the same time to disengage the brake. electric parking brake engaged, or using it several times to slow down the vehicle, may cause severe damage to the braking system. 149 “Drive Away Release" — if equipped: Safe Hold AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION the electric park brake will automatically Safe Hold is a safety function that The vehicle can be equipped with an disengage with the driver side seat belt automatically engages the electric park electronically controlled 8-speed fastened and the detection of an action brake in the event of a dangerous automatic transmission where gear performed by the driver to move the condition for the vehicle. shifting automatically takes place, vehicle (DRIVE [D] or REVERSE [R]). This The electric park brake engages depending on the vehicle usage feature can be turned on or off in the instantaneous parameters (vehicle Information and Entertainment System. automatically to prevent vehicle movement if: speed, grade, and accelerator pedal "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is position). lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear The vehicle speed is below 2 mph The new transmission is an absolute selector is not in PARK (P) position and (3 km/h). innovation, as it can match the the driver's intention of leaving the A transmission operating mode Stop/Start system with the traditional vehicle is detected, the electric park different from PARK (P) is activated. automatic transmissions with built-in brake will automatically engage to hold torque converter. For further the vehicle in safety conditions. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. information, refer to the “Stop/Start” The driver side door is open. section within this chapter. STARTING AND OPERATING "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed Manual gear shifting can still occur is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric No attempts to apply pressure on the thanks to the "Sequential" mode position park brake will automatically engage brake pedal have been detected. when the gear selector is in PARK (P) for the gear selector. position. The light on the switch located The vehicle is parked on roads with a on the center console switches on slope of more than 4%. together with the BRAKE warning light on The “Safe Hold” function can be Warning! the instrument panel when the park brake temporarily disabled by pressing the EPB is engaged and applied to the wheels. switch located on the center console and It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Each automatic park brake engagement the brake pedal at the same time, with NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than can be cancelled by pressing the switch the vehicle stationary and the driver side idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the center console and at the same door open. the brake pedal, the vehicle could time moving the gear selector for the Once disabled, the function will activate accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. transmission to position PARK (P). again when the vehicle speed reaches Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your to STOP and then to ON. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

150 Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all Caution! vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission into PARK, and turn the the following precautions are not observed: ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is only after the vehicle has come to a locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against complete stop. unwanted movement. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, When leaving the vehicle, always make NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, 07076S0001EM above idle speed. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and Gear Display lock the vehicle. Before shifting into any gear, make sure Gear Selector Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing The gear functioning is controlled by the gear selector, which can assume the children to be in a vehicle unattended is Display dangerous for a number of reasons. A child following positions: or others could be seriously or fatally The following information is shown on the P = PARK injured. Children should be warned not to dedicated area of the display: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the R = REVERSE transmission gear selector. In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear N = NEUTRAL Do not leave the key fob in or near the number. vehicle (or in a location accessible to D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed) children), and do not leave the ignition in the In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): AutoStick: + manually shift to higher AVVor ON mode. A child could operate the mode (M), the current gear and the gear; – manually shift to lower gear power windows, other controls, or move the double or single gear shift request, both vehicle. up and down (single or double arrow).

151 The positions diagram is illustrated on To transition the vehicle into REVERSE the top of the gear selector. (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) mode, it is necessary to move the gear selector by pushing the gear selector button. When using AutoStick, activate it by moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to the left and then forward toward the - symbol or backward toward the + symbol and the gear is changed. 07076V0005EM Gear Selector To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE 07076V0002EM 3 — Gear Selector Button Gear Selector Center Console (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or stopped, and 1 — Gear Selector The gear selector is a joystick style the brake pedal must also be pressed. STARTING AND OPERATING 2 — PARK (P) Button shifting mechanism which returns to the Note: center position automatically. It can be The letter corresponding to the mode pushed forward twice and rearward DO NOT accelerate while shifting selected on the gear selector lights up twice, based on the starting condition. from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and appears on the instrument cluster The PARK (P) mode can be to another position. display. enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK After selecting a gear, wait a few To select a mode, move the gear selector (P) button. PARK (P) mode is seconds before accelerating. This forward or rearward while pressing the automatically activated if the following precaution is particularly important with brake pedal. To engage REVERSE (R), conditions are met simultaneously: engine cold. press the brake pedal together with the DRIVE (D) mode or REVERSE (R) mode It is not possible to select NEUTRAL gear selector button. is active (N) mode from PARK (P) mode. The vehicle’s speed is close to 0 mph Transmission Operating Modes (0 km/h) PARK (P) The brake pedal is released The transmission is locked in this mode. The driver’s seat belt is not fastened The engine can be started in this mode. The driver’s door is open

152 Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or mode when the vehicle is moving. Before NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Caution! leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing is engaged (letter P shown on the display the brake pedal, the vehicle could and gear selector) and that the park accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Before moving the transmission gear brake is engaged. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit selector out of PARK, you must push the someone or something. Only shift into gear When parking on a flat surface, first ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF when the engine is idling normally and your mode to the ON mode, and also press the engage the PARK (P) mode and then foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. engage the electric park brake. brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. When parking uphill, before activating Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all DO NOT race the engine when shifting the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear park brake. Otherwise, it could be while the engine is running. Before exiting a range, as this can damage the drivetrain. difficult to engage the (P) mode. vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift To check that the PARK (P) mode is the transmission into PARK, and turn the actually engaged, make sure (P) is ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in REVERSE (R) illuminated on the display and on the gear the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against Select this mode only with the vehicle at selector. unwanted movement. a standstill. When leaving the vehicle, always make NEUTRAL (N) Warning! sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, Use this range when the vehicle is remove the key fob from the vehicle, and standing for prolonged periods with the lock the vehicle. engine running. The engine may be Never use the PARK position as a Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or started in this range. Apply the electric substitute for the park brake. Always apply with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing park brake and shift the transmission the park brake fully when parked to guard children to be in a vehicle unattended is into PARK (P) if you must leave the against vehicle movement and possible dangerous for a number of reasons. A child vehicle. injury or damage. or others could be seriously or fatally Yourvehicle could move and injure you injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the and others if it is not in PARK. Check by Warning! trying to move the gear selector out of transmission gear selector. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make Do not leave the key fob in or near the sure the transmission is in PARK before vehicle (or in a location accessible to Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off leaving the vehicle. children), and do not leave the ignition in the the ignition to coast down a hill. These are ON mode. A child could operate power unsafe practices that limit your response to windows, other controls, or move the changing traffic or road conditions. You vehicle. might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. 153 DRIVE (D) Activation Deactivation Use this mode in normal driving Starting from DRIVE (D) mode, to To deactivate the sequential driving conditions. activate the sequential drive mode, move mode, bring the gear selector back in Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or the gear selector to the left (– and + position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving REVERSE (R) modes must take place indication of the trim). The gear engaged mode). only after releasing the accelerator will be shown on the display. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Shifting is made by moving the gear brake pedal pressed. selector forward, toward symbol – or Warning! This mode ensures automatic backward, toward symbol +. engagement of the most suitable gears Steering Column Mounted Shift Do not downshift for additional engine for driving needs and maximum fuel Paddles — If Equipped braking on a slippery surface. The drive economy in terms of consumption. The gear can be manually shifted also by wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle In this position, the transmission shifts using the paddles behind the steering could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. the gears automatically, selecting the wheel, pull the right paddle (+) toward the most suitable for forward driving among steering wheel and release it to engage a those available as you go. In this way the STARTING AND OPERATING higher gear, perform the same operation Note: vehicle's optimal driving characteristics with the left paddle (-) to engage a lower are provided for all conditions. To select the correct gear for gear. maximum deceleration (engine brake), AutoStick just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for transmission goes to an operating mode sport driving, when the vehicle is driven in which the vehicle can slow down with a heavy load, on slopes, when towing easily. heavy trailers), it is recommended to use The vehicle will keep the gear the AutoStick (sequential shifting) mode selected by the driver until the safety to select and keep a lower fixed ratio. conditions allow it. In these conditions, the use of a lower gear improves vehicle performance and This means, for example, that the prevents overheating. system will try to prevent the engine from switching off, automatically It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) 07076V0006EM mode to AutoStick mode regardless of Steering Column Mounted Shift downshifting if the engine speed is too vehicle speed. Paddles low. Note: If only one manual shift is necessary, the letter (D) will remain on the display with the engaged gear next to it. 154 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Note: Even if the transmission can be 3. Push the ignition button for at least Mode reset, we recommend that you visit your three seconds. authorized dealer at your earliest Transmission function is monitored The automatic activation of PARK (P) possible convenience. Yourauthorized electronically for abnormal conditions. If when the engine is stopped can also be dealer has diagnostic equipment to a condition is detected that could result deactivated on the Information and determine if the problem could reoccur. If in transmission damage, Transmission Entertainment system by selecting the the transmission cannot be reset, service Limp Home Mode is activated. following functions on the main menu: is required at your authorized dealer. In this condition, the transmission stays "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and in fourth gear, regardless of the selected Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock "Automatic Parking Brake". gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) System Important Notes and NEUTRAL (N) still work. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Failure to comply with what is reported The symbol might light up in the Transmission Shift Interlock system below may damage the transmission: instrument cluster. (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the Temporary failure PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. vehicle at a standstill. In the event of a momentary problem, the This system prevents you from moving transmission can be reset to regain all the gear selector from position PARK (P) Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass forward gears by performing the unless the brakes are applied. from REVERSE to another mode only following steps: To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), with the vehicle at a standstill and engine the ignition must be cycled to the ON idling. 1. Stop the vehicle. position (engine running or not) and the Do not change between PARK (P), brake pedal must be pressed. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) if possible. If not, shift the transmission Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock modes with engine running at a speed to NEUTRAL (N). Disabling above idling. 3. Push and hold the ignition until the Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the Before activating any transmission engine turns OFF. vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing operating mode, fully depress the brake systems), inhibit the automatic activation pedal. 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then of PARK (P) mode when stopping the restart the engine. engine. To do so, follow the directions Note: The unexpected movement of the below: vehicle can injure the occupants or 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle the problem is no longer detected, the 1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill. with engine running: before getting out of transmission will return to normal the passenger compartment always 2. Place the transmission in the operation. engage the electric park brake, select the NEUTRAL (N) position. PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.

155 Do not leave the key fob in or near the ALFA DNA SELECTOR Warning! vehicle (or in a location accessible to Alfa DNA System children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVVor ON mode. A child could operate This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or power windows, other controls, or move the system selector (located on the center NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than vehicle. console). There are three modes of idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing operation to be selected according to the brake pedal, the vehicle could driving style and road conditions: accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Caution! Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your Only engage the gear with engine at idling foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the Unintended movement of a vehicle could transmission temperature exceeds the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all normal operating limits, the transmission vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle control unit may change the gear while the engine is running. Before exiting a engagement order and reduce the drive STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift torque. If the transmission overheats, it the transmission into PARK, and turn the could operate incorrectly until it cools down. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in When using the vehicle with extremely the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is 07076S0004BASE low external temperatures, the Alfa DNA System Selector locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against transmission operation may change unwanted movement. depending on the engine and transmission d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). When leaving the vehicle, always make temperature, as well as vehicle speed. sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, Activation of the torque converter clutch n = Natural (mode for driving in normal remove the key fob from the vehicle, and and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the conditions). lock the vehicle. transmission oil is correctly warmed up. Complete operation of the transmission will a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature mode for maximum fuel savings). with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing reaches the predefined value. children to be in a vehicle unattended is = Adjusts the calibration of the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child active suspension (if equipped). or others could be seriously or fatally On the instrument panel display, the injured. Children should be warned not to different modes are characterized by touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the different colors: transmission gear selector. Natural - Blue

156 Dynamic - Red Activation "Dynamic" Mode Advanced Efficiency - Green It is activated by rotating the selector to Activation the letter "n"; the display will light up in It is activated by rotating the selector to blue. the letter "d"; the display will light up in red.

07076S0003EM Mode Display 07116S0002EM Each driving mode is graphically different Natural Mode in frame color and contents of each 07116S0003EM The "Performance" screen graphically Dynamic Mode individual "performance" screen. reproduces some parameters closely ESC and ASR systems: intervention Driving Modes linked to the efficiency of the driving thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, style, with a view to limiting consumption. "Natural" Mode sportier driving while guaranteeing the “Natural” Mode is characterized by stability of the vehicle. reduced engine performance and ECO Engine and transmission: adoption of shifting strategy for the automatic sports mapping. transmission.

07116S0001EM Natural Mode Performance Display

157 "Advanced Efficiency" Mode Warning! Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "a"; the display will light up in In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. green. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

07116S0008EM Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display Driving Mode Deactivation To deactivate any driving mode, simply STARTING AND OPERATING 07116S0005EM move the selector to any other mode. Advanced Efficiency Mode Note: ESC and ASR systems: intervention The next time that the engine is thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum 07116S0006EM started, the "Advanced Efficiency", Dynamic Mode Performance Display safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is "Dynamic" and "Natural" mode selected advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" The "Performance" screen displays previously is retained. The system will mode in the presence of low-grip road reactivate in "Advanced Efficiency", parameters related to vehicle stability, surfaces. the graphs illustrate the trend of the "Dynamic" or "Natural" mode, depending Engine and transmission: standard longitudinal/lateral accelerations on which mode was selected before the response. (G-meter information), considering engine was stopped. gravity acceleration as a reference unit. The "Performance" screen graphically displays some parameters closely Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed related to the vehicle consumption. on the right.

158 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION STOP/START SYSTEM Engine stopping is signaled by the (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start system automatically symbol lighting up on the instrument The vehicle's electronic suspension shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop cluster display. management system is aimed at if the required conditions are met. Restarting The Engine optimizing the vehicle's performance. Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator To restart the engine, release the brake The system continuously monitors the pedal will automatically restart the pedal. engine. damping of the suspensions through the With the brake pressed and the actuator installed on each shock The function was developed to increase transmission in automatic mode DRIVE absorber. This way, the calibration of the vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel (D), the engine will restart by shifting to shock absorbers can be adjusted to the consumption, gas emissions, and sound REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to conditions of the road surface and to the pollution. "AutoStick". dynamic conditions of the vehicle, Note: When the Stop/Start system With brake pressed if the gear selector is improving its comfort and road holding. stops the engine, the power steering is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will The driver can choose, even while driving, also disabled. restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by (only in "Dynamic” mode), between two Operating Mode moving the selector to + or -. types of suspension calibration: a more sporty or a more comfortable one. Stopping The Engine System Manual Activation/ By pushing the button, the system With the vehicle at a standstill and brake Deactivation changes the shock absorber calibration. pedal pressed, the engine switches off if To manually activate/deactivate the the gear selector is in a position other system, push the button located in the than REVERSE (R). control panel on the left of the steering The system does not operate when the wheel. gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to make parking maneuvers easier. In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine). Note: The engine can only be

04306V0001EM automatically stopped after having run at Alfa Active Suspension Button about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs In case of a system failure, the symbol to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) 07126V0001NA and a dedicated message will be to stop the engine. shown on the instrument panel display. Stop/Start On/Off Button 159 System Activation During the first period of use, to Energy Saving Function initialize the system. The activation of the system is indicated If the driver does not carry out any action by the symbol lighting up on the Steering angle beyond threshold. for more than three minutes after the display. In this condition, the light on the automatic engine restart, the Start/Stop button is off. Engine Restarting Conditions system will switch off the engine in order System Deactivation Due to comfort, emission control, and to prevent fuel consumption. A message will appear on the display safety reasons, the engine can restart In this situation, the engine can only be when the system is deactivated. In this automatically without any action by the restarted using the ignition device. condition, the light on the button is on. driver, under special conditions, such as: Note: It is possible to keep the engine Note: Each time the engine is started, Battery not sufficiently charged. running by deactivating the system. the system is activated regardless of Irregular Operation where was when it was previously Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. switched off. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Start system is deactivated. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on For failure indications, refer to "Warning Autostop roads with a grade). STARTING AND OPERATING Lights and Messages" paragraph in For higher comfort and increased safety, Engine stopping by the Stop/Start "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel". and to reduce emissions, there are system for more than approx. three Vehicle Inactivity certain conditions where the engine will minutes. not autostop despite the system being With the automatic climate control In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the active, such as: active, an adjustment in cabin heating or battery is replaced), special attention must be paid to the disconnection of the Engine still cold. cooling is made or with MAX-DEF function active. battery power supply. Especially cold outside temperature. Proceed as follows: Safety Functions Battery not sufficiently charged. Remove connector from socket to When the engine is stopped through the disconnect sensor (battery status Driver's door not shut. Stop/Start system, if the driver releases monitoring) installed on the negative pole Driver's seat belt not fastened. their seat belt, opens the driver's or of the battery. This sensor should never passenger's door, or opens the hood from be disconnected from the pole except if Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking inside the vehicle, the engine can be the battery is replaced. maneuvers). restarted only by using the ignition. With the automatic climate control This condition is indicated to the driver active, an adequate cabin heating or both through a buzzer and a message on cooling comfort has not been reached or the instrument cluster display. with MAX-DEF function active. 160 SPEED LIMITER Description This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can be set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30mk/h).

07126V0002EM When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM Battery Power Supply speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed 1 — Socket Speed Limit Programming speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit 2 — Sensor Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed 3 — Connector through the Information and Activation Entertainment System. Note: After setting the ignition to STOP The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, and having closed the driver side door, deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: wait at least one minute before Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter disconnecting the electrical supply from Activating The Device Set Speed". the battery. When reconnecting the To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed electrical supply to the battery, make select the following items in sequence: increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a and the driver side door is closed. “ON”. maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. function remains available in RACE mode. 161 Programmed Speed Icon Flashing SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE The programmed speed will flash in the CONTROL) Warning! following scenarios: Speed Control Description When the accelerator pedal has been This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the fully pressed and the vehicle has assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. exceeded the programmed speed. desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and Activating the system after setting a without having to press the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control limit below the effective speed of the in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, vehicle. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery. stretches of dry, straight roads with few In the event of overtake acceleration. variations (highways). To Activate Deactivation The speed control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, The feature can be activated/ push the on/off button located on the left Note: deactivated through the Information and side of the steering wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING Entertainment System. To ensure correct operation, the Deactivating The Device speed control is designed to deactivate To access this feature on the main menu, if more than one function is operated select the following items in sequence: simultaneously. In this case, the system "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and can be reactivated by pushing the on/off “OFF”. button and setting the desired speed. Automatic Deactivation Of The Device It is not recommended to use this The device deactivates automatically in feature in city traffic. the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set 07146V0001EM Temporary Signal Loss speed the same. Speed Control On/Off Button When the devices loses the signal, the The activation of the system is signaled white symbol without the speed by the white warning light illuminating indication illuminates on the display. in the instrument cluster display. System Failure If there is a system failure, the amber symbol illuminates on the display. 162 The Speed Control function can remain increase speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) active at the same time as the Speed increments. The new speed will then be Limiter System. If a speed limit below the set. one indicated in the set speed control is At every movement of the SET switch, set, the speed control speed will be the set speed will be adjusted. lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. Decreasing Speed When the system is active, to reduce the Warning! speed, push the SET switch downward. Pushing the switch downward to the first detent will decrease speed in 1 mph Leaving the Speed Control system on when 07146V0002EM Set Switch Location (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch not in use is dangerous. Youcould downward to the second detent will accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control If needed (when overtaking for instance), decrease speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) and have an accident. Always leave the you can accelerate beyond the set speed increments. The new speed will then be system OFF when you are not using it. by pressing the accelerator. When you set. release the pedal, the vehicle goes back At every movement of the SET switch, to the previously set speed. Setting The Desired Speed the set speed will be adjusted. When traveling downhill with the system Note: Moving the SET switch allows the To set a desired speed, proceed as active, the vehicle speed may slightly driver to adjust the speed according to follows: exceed the set one. the selected unit of measurement set in 1. Turn the Speed Control on. Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the the Information and Entertainment vehicle must be traveling at a constant System (see dedicated supplement). 2. When the vehicle has reached the speed on a flat surface. desired speed, push the SET switch up or Accelerating When Overtaking To VaryThe Speed Setting down and release to activate. When the Press the accelerator as you would accelerator is released, the vehicle will Increasing Speed normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. maintain the selected speed Once the Speed Control has been automatically. activated, the speed can be increased by Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes pushing the SET switch upward. The vehicle can automatically downshift Pushing the switch upward to the first to keep the set speed when driving on detent will increase speed in 1 mph hilly routes. (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch upward to the second detent will

163 On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed To Deactivate ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL may be considerable and is advisable to Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED deactivate the Speed Control system. deactivates the speed control without System Description Note: The system keeps the speed set deleting the set speed. even uphill and downhill. A slight variation Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver The speed control may also be in the speed on slight elevations is assist system that combines the speed deactivated by applying the electric park completely normal. control functions with maintaining the brake or when the braking system is distance from the vehicle ahead. To Resume The Speed operated (e.g. operation of the ESC The system allows to set and hold the Note: Before returning to the previously system). vehicle at the desired speed without set speed, you must accelerate to a The set speed is deleted in the following needing to press the accelerator. It also speed close to the set speed, then push cases: allows to set and hold a distance from the and release the RES button. Pushing the on/off button twice vehicle ahead (these settings are set by the driver). The ignition is cycled to the STOP position The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system uses a radar sensor located STARTING AND OPERATING There is a malfunction with the Speed behind the front bumper and a camera Control. located in the center/upper part of the windshield, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead.

07146V0003EM Resume Button Location

06016V0003EM Front Bumper Radar Location

164 Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the roads with numerous turns and bends. vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not Entering a turn lane. start moving within 3 minutes the parking Towing a trailer. brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled. When circumstances do not allow Youshould switch off the ACC system: safe driving at a constant speed. When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway 06016V0004EM Warning! construction zones). Windshield Camera Location When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are This system enhances driving comfort Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have while on the highway or out of town with convenience system. It is not a substitute steep uphill or downhill slopes. light traffic. for active driving involvement. It is always If the sensor does not detect a vehicle the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of When circumstances do not allow safe ahead, the system will maintain a fixed road, traffic, and weather conditions, driving at a constant speed. set speed. vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the ensure safe operation of the vehicle under Activation/Deactivation system automatically intervenes by all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention The system has four operating states: braking (or accelerating) slightly in order is always required while driving to maintain keep the set distance while not safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow Enabled (speed not set) exceeding the original set speed, seeking these warnings can result in a collision and to adapt to the speed of the vehicle death or serious personal injury. Activated (speed set) ahead. The ACC system: Paused Note: Adaptive Cruise Control Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Deactivated performance is not guaranteed under the vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a following circumstances, and it is stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled recommended to disable the system vehicle). under the following circumstances: Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones. Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. 165 Enabling / Activation To enable the system, push and release Warning! the (on/off) button located on the left side of the steering wheel. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

07146V0017EM Pausing / Deactivating SET Switch With the system enabled (speed not set), push the (on/off) button to disable. While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the system will not be able to control the With the system active (speed set), push 07146V0010EM distance between the vehicle and the one the (on/off) button to pause. The

STARTING AND OPERATING On/Off Button ahead. In this case, the speed will be display will show the icon in white with determined only by the position of the When the system is enabled and ready to the speed in brackets. To then deactivate accelerator pedal. operate, the display shows a white the system, push the (on/off) button vehicle icon above dashes in place of the again. The system will return to normal speed. operation as soon as the accelerator Setting The Desired Speed pedal is released. The speed can be set from a minimum of The system cannot be set: 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of When pressing the brake pedal. 100 mph (160 km/h). When the vehicle reaches the desired When the brakes are overheated. speed, push the SET switch upward or When the electric park brake has been downward and release it to activate the operated. system. When the accelerator is released, the vehicle will maintain the set speed When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or automatically. NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.

07146S0016EM When the engine rpm is above a Enabled Icons maximum threshold. Setting a speed activates the system. When the vehicle speed is not within The display shows the icon in green with the operational speed range. the set speed. 166 When the ESC (or ABS or other increase speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) The transmission could change to a stability control systems) are operating increments. The new speed will then be lower gear when driving downhill, or or have just operated. set. when accelerating. This is normal and necessary to maintain the set speed. When the ESC system is off. Decreasing Speed The system will disable while driving When the Forward Collision Warning When the system is active, to reduce the if the brakes overheat. system (if equipped) is braking speed, push the SET switch downward. automatically. Pushing the switch downward to the first Accelerating When Overtaking detent will decrease speed in 1 mph In the event of system failure. (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch When driving with ACC activated and When the engine is OFF. downward to the second detent will following a vehicle, the system will decrease speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) provide an additional acceleration up to In case of obstruction of the radar increments. The new speed will then be the ACC set speed to assist in passing the sensor (in this case the bumper area set. vehicle. This additional acceleration is where it is located must be cleaned). triggered when the driver utilizes the left If the system is set, the conditions Note: turn signal and will only be active when described above also cause a Moving the SET switch allows you to passing on the left hand side. cancellation or deactivation of the adjust the speed according to the The system detects the direction of system. These situations may vary selected unit of measurement ("US" or traffic automatically when the vehicle according to the conditions. "metric") set on the Information and passes from left-hand traffic to Note: The system will not be deactivated Entertainment System (see dedicated right-hand traffic. In this case, the when speeds higher than those set are supplement). overtaking assist function is only active when the reference vehicle is overtaken reached by pressing the accelerator By keeping the accelerator pedal pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In on the right. The additional acceleration depressed, the vehicle can continue to is deactivated when the driver uses the these situations, the system may not accelerate beyond the set speed. In this work correctly and it is recommended to right turn signal and returns to the case, use the SET switch to set the original lane. deactivate it. speed to the vehicle’s current speed. Resuming The Speed To VaryThe Speed Setting When you push the SET button to Increasing Speed reduce the speed, the braking system Once the system has been canceled but Once the Speed Control has been intervenes automatically if the engine not deactivated, to resume a previously activated, the speed can be increased by brake does not slow the vehicle down set speed, simply push the RES button pushing the SET switch upward. sufficiently to reach the set speed. The and remove your foot from the device holds the set speed uphill and accelerator to recall it. Pushing the switch upward to the first downhill; however a slight variation is detent will increase speed in 1 mph entirely normal, particularly on slight (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch inclines. upward to the second detent will 167 The system will be set to the last stored speed.

07146S0019EM 07146V0015EM Distance Icons Distance Button 07146V0018EM The distances from the vehicle ahead are The set speed is held if there are no RES (Resume) Button proportional to speed. vehicles ahead. Once the shortest Before returning to the previously set The interval of time with relation to the distance has been selected, the next push

STARTING AND OPERATING speed, bring the speed close to that vehicle ahead remains constant and of the button will set the maximum speed, then push the RES button and varies from one second (for the short distance. release it. distance one-bar setting) to two seconds If a slower vehicle is detected in the same (for the maximum distance four-bar lane, the vehicle icon on the display setting). illuminates from grey to white. The Warning! The set distance is shown on the display system automatically adjusts the by a dedicated icon. vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, The Resume function should only be used if The setting is four (maximum) the first independently of the set speed. traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming time the system is used. After the The vehicle holds the set distance until: a set speed that is too high or too low for distance has been modified by the driver, prevailing traffic and road conditions could The vehicle ahead accelerates to a cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate the new distance will be stored also after speed higher than the set speed. too sharply for safe operation. Failure to the system is deactivated and follow these warnings can result in a collision reactivated. The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or and death or serious personal injury. the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise To Decrease The Distance Control system sensor. Push and release the distance button to Setting The Distance Between Vehicles decrease the distance setting. The The distance setting is changed. The distance between your vehicle and distance setting decreases by one bar The Adaptive Cruise Control system is the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (shorter) every time the button is pushed. deactivated/paused. (short), two bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars (maximum). 168 This could be due to an obstruction of the vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also Warning! Warning! be due to a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of The maximum breaking applied by the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver the windshield opposite the interior rear system is limited. The driver may apply the must ensure that there are no pedestrians, view mirror, where the camera is located, brakes in all cases if needed. vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. as well as the area of the front bumper Failure to follow these warnings can result in If the system predicts that the braking where the sensor is located. Then check a collision and death or serious personal that the message has disappeared. level is insufficient to hold the set distance, injury. either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is When the conditions limiting the system displayed to warn the driver of approaching functions end, normal operation will the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also Deactivation resume. emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe The system is deactivated and the set Should the fault persist, contact your distance from the vehicle ahead. speed is canceled if: authorized dealer. The driver is responsible for ensuring that The (on/off) button is pushed (when Precautions While Driving there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or the system is on or paused). The system may not work correctly in objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions The ignition is in STOP mode. some driving conditions (see below). The may cause serious accidents and injuries. driver must control the vehicle at all The system is canceled (the set speed times. The driver is fully responsible for holding and distance are stored): a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Towing A Trailer respecting the highway code in force in the When the system is paused (refer to the “Activation / Deactivation” section). Use of this system is not recommended respective country. while towing a trailer. When the conditions shown in the Vehicle Not Aligned “Stop And Go” Function “Setting The Desired Speed” section occur. The system may not detect a vehicle The “Stop and Go” feature allows you to traveling in the same lane, in the same maintain a safe distance from the vehicle Limited Operation Warning direction, but is not aligned. It also may ahead until the vehicle has completely If the dedicated message is shown on the not detect a vehicle which is cutting in stopped. It will also restart the vehicle display, a condition limiting the Adaptive from a side lane. Sufficient distance from automatically if the vehicle ahead drives Cruise Control operation may have the vehicles ahead may not be away within two seconds, otherwise it is occurred. guaranteed in these cases. necessary to press the accelerator pedal The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and or push the RES button to restart. out of the driving lane causing the vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. 169 Steering And Curves Lane Change Driving on curves with the system set The system may not detect the presence could limit speed and acceleration to of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. guarantee vehicle stability, even if no vehicles are detected ahead. When leaving the curve, the system resets the previously set speed.

06016V0006EM Small Vehicles Sufficient distance from the vehicles 06016V0007EM ahead may not be guaranteed in these Lane Change cases.

STARTING AND OPERATING In this case, sufficient distance from the Stationary Objects And Vehicles vehicle which is changing lanes may not The system cannot detect the presence 06016V0005EM be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the Steering And Curves of stationary vehicles or objects. For utmost attention at all times and be example, the system will not operate if Note: always ready to apply the brakes if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a needed. In cases of narrow curves, the vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in performance of the system could be Small Vehicles that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all limited. In this case, it is advisable to Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and times and be always ready to apply the deactivate the system. motorcycles) traveling near the outer brakes if needed. edges of the lane or which enter the lane The system only limits the speed Objects And Vehicles Moving In from curb side are not detected until they DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. Opposite Or Crosswise Direction are fully in the lane. The system cannot detect the presence Using The System On Slopes of objects or vehicles traveling in When driving on roads with a variable opposite or crosswise directions and incline, the system may not detect the consequently will not activate. presence of a vehicle in the lane. System performance could be limited according to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. 170 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM Vehicles With Rear Parking Sensors Only The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper, detect obstacles while the vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert will sound and visual indications will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

06016V0008EM 07176V0052NA Objects And Vehicles Moving In Park Sensors System On/Off Button Opposite Or Crosswise Direction The indicator light within the Park General Information Sensors System button will also be on in case of system failure. If the button is The following regulatory statement pushed with a system failure, the applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) indicator light will flash for devices equipped in this vehicle: approximately five seconds. The light will This device complies with Part 15 of the then stay on constantly. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, license-exempt RSS standard(s). 07176V0001EM the Park Sensors System keeps the last Operation is subject to the following two Rear Sensor Locations state when the engine was stopped conditions: Engagement/Disengagement (activated or deactivated) in its memory. 1. This device may not cause harmful To turn the system off, push the Park System Activation/Deactivation interference. Sensors System button located to the The system, when engaged, is 2. This device must accept any left of the headlight switch. The indicator automatically activated by engaging the interference received, including light within the button will illuminate REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by interference that may cause undesired when the system is turned off. Pushing engaging another gear. operation. the button a second time will turn the system back on, and the indicator light Acoustic Signal Note: Changes or modifications not will turn off. When REVERSE is engaged and there is expressly approved by the party an obstacle behind the vehicle, an responsible for compliance could void the acoustic signal with variable frequency user’s authority to operate the will sound. equipment. 171 The acoustic signal increases in Visual Indications Messages On The Display frequency as the distance between the The system indicates the presence of an In case of system failure, a dedicated vehicle and the obstacle decreases. obstacle by displaying a single red arc in message appears on the instrument The acoustic signal becomes the detected area, in relation to the cluster for about five seconds. distance of the object and the position of continuous when the distance between Cleaning The Sensors: If the display the vehicle. the vehicle and the obstacle is less than shows a message requiring the sensors 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the If the obstacle is detected in the rear to be cleaned, make sure that the outer distance increases. central area, a single red arc will be surface and the underside of the rear displayed as the obstacle approaches, The acoustic signal is constant if the bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, mud, first constant, then flashing, in addition ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear, distance between the vehicle and the to an acoustic signal. obstacle is unchanged. cycle the ignition to the STOP position. If the obstacle is detected in the rear left Then, return it to ON. If the message is Note: If several obstacles are detected and/or right area, a single red flashing arc still displayed, contact your authorized by the sensors, only the nearest one is will be shown in the corresponding area dealer. considered. on the display and the system will emit an An acoustic signal will not sound if the acoustic signal, either at frequent Audio System Not Available: If the STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle is in PARK. intervals or constantly. display shows a message that the audio system is not available, it means that the Indication On Display In general, the vehicle is closer to the acoustic signal will be emitted by the obstacle when a single red flashing arc is The driver can select the type of warning instrument panel, and not through the shown on the display and the acoustic they would like to be displayed through vehicles speakers. signal becomes continuous. the Information and Entertainment System. To access the function on the If several obstacles are detected Operation With A Trailer main menu, select in the following order: simultaneously in the rear area, the The operation of the Park Sensors display will show all of them, regardless System is automatically deactivated 1. “Settings.” of the area in which they were detected. when a trailer’s electrical connector is 2. “Driver Assistance.” It is not possible to exit from the display plugged into the vehicle. The sensors are screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. automatically reactivated when the 3. “ParkSense.” electrical connector is removed. Fault Indication 4. “Mode.” Note: Some conditions may affect the Parking sensor faults, if any, will be performance of the Park Sensors 5. “Sound-Display.” indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a System: message on the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Warning Lights And Reduced sensor sensitivity could be Messages On The Instrument Panel" in due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" thick paint on the surface of the sensor. for further information. 172 The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo interference) due to Warning! Caution! mechanical interference, for example when washing the vehicle or in extreme weather. Before using the Park Sensors System, it The Park Sensors System is only a The signals sent by the sensors can is strongly recommended that the ball parking aid and it is unable to recognize mount and hitch ball assembly is be altered by the presence of ultrasonic every obstacle, including small obstacles. disconnected from the vehicle when the Parking curbs might be temporarily systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do detected or not detected at all. Obstacles of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the so can result in injury or damage to vehicles located above or below the sensors will not vehicle. or obstacles because the hitch ball will be be detected when they are in close much closer to the obstacle than the rear proximity. System performance can be fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the influenced by the position of the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could The vehicle must be driven slowly when sensors. For example, due to a change in detect the ball mount and hitch ball using the Park Sensors System in order to the ride setting (caused by wear to the assembly, depending on its size and shape, be able to stop in time when an obstacle is shock absorbers or suspension), by giving a false indication that an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver changing tires, overloading the vehicle or behind the vehicle. looks over his/her shoulder when using the Park Sensors System. operations that require the vehicle to be Drivers must be careful when backing up lowered. even when using the Park Sensors System. Be sure not to place bumper stickers Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for or other adhesives over the sensors as pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, this will affect system performance. obstructions, and blind spots before The presence of a trailer hitch backing up. Youare responsible for safety without a trailer. This may interfere with and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in the operation of the parking sensors. serious injury or death. Before using the Park Sensors System, it is recommended to remove or close the trailer hitch assembly when the vehicle is not being used for towing.

173 Vehicles With Front And Rear Parking Engagement/Disengagement Acoustic Signal Sensors — If Equipped To turn the system off, push the Park In the presence of an obstacle at the The parking sensors, located in the front Sensors System switch located to the front or the rear of the vehicle, an and rear bumpers, detect the presence of left of the headlight switch. The indicator acoustic signal with variable frequency any obstacles and warn the driver light within the switch will illuminate will sound: when the system is turned off. Pushing through an acoustic signal and visual The acoustic signal increases in the switch a second time will turn the indications will be displayed on the frequency as the distance between the system back on, and the indicator light instrument cluster. vehicle and the obstacle decreases. will turn off. The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than pushed with a system failure, the 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the indicator light will flash for distance increases. approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the STARTING AND OPERATING Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, obstacle is unchanged. the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle 07176V0003EM (activated or deactivated) in its memory. Front Sensor Locations is considered. An intermittent signal will System Activation/Deactivation sound if the obstacles are at the same When the REVERSE gear is engaged and distance (front and rear). the system is on, the front and rear When the system emits an acoustic sensors are activated. If the vehicle signal, the volume of the Information and moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Entertainment System, if activated, is the rear sensors are deactivated, while automatically lowered. the front sensors remain active until the Indication On Display speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. The driver can select the type of warning Note: In certain operating conditions, the they would like to be displayed through system could start detecting an obstacle the Information and Entertainment only after the vehicle has moved slightly 07176V0001EM System. To access the function on the (a few inches). Rear Sensor Locations main menu, select in the following order: 1. “Settings.” 2. “Driver Assistance.” 174 3. “ParkSense.” Fault Indication Operation With A Trailer 4. “Mode.” Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The operation of the rear sensors is indicated by a message on the display on automatically deactivated when a 5. “Sound-Display.” the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning trailer’s electrical connector is plugged Visual Indications Lights And Messages On The Instrument into the vehicle, while the front sensors Panel" in "Getting To Know Your stay active and can provide acoustic and The system indicates the presence of an Instrument Panel" for further visual warnings. The rear sensors are obstacle by displaying a single red arc in information. automatically reactivated when the the detected areas, in relation to the electrical connector is removed. distance of the object and the position of Messages On The Display Note: Some conditions may influence the vehicle. In case of system failure, a dedicated the performance of the Park Sensors message appears on the instrument If the obstacle is detected in the front or System: rear central area, a single red arc will be cluster for about 5 seconds. Reduced sensor sensitivity could be displayed as the obstacle approaches, Cleaning the front or rear sensors:If due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or first constant, then flashing, in addition the display shows a message requiring thick paint on the surface of the sensor. to an acoustic signal. the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that If the obstacle is detected in the front or the outer surface and the underside of The sensors may detect a false rear left and/or right area, a single red the front and rear bumpers are free of obstacle (echo interference) due to flashing arc will be shown in the debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once mechanical interference, for example corresponding area on the display and these areas are clear, place the ignition in when washing the vehicle or in extreme the system will emit an acoustic signal, STOP mode. Then, return it to ON mode. weather. either at frequent intervals or constantly. If the message is still displayed, contact The signals sent by the sensors can If several obstacles are detected your authorized dealer. be altered by the presence of ultrasonic simultaneously in the front and rear area, Audio system not available: If the systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems the display will show all of them, display shows a message that the audio of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the regardless of the area in which they were system is not available, it means that the vehicle. detected. acoustic signal will be emitted by the System performance can be In general, the vehicle is closer to the instrument panel, and not through the influenced by the position of the obstacle when a single or several flashing vehicles speakers. arcs are shown on the display and the sensors. For example, due to a change in acoustic signal becomes continuous. the ride setting (caused by wear to the It is not possible to exit from the display shock absorbers or suspension), by screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. changing tires, overloading the vehicle or operations that require the vehicle to be lowered.

175 Be sure not to place bumper stickers LANE DEPARTURE WARNING or other adhesives over the sensors as Caution! (LDW) SYSTEM this will affect system performance. Description The presence of a trailer hitch without a trailer. This may interfere with The Park Sensors System is only a The Lane Departure Warning system uses the operation of the parking sensors. parking aid and it is unable to recognize a forward looking camera located on the Before using the Park Sensors System, every obstacle, including small obstacles. windshield to detect lane markings and Parking curbs might be temporarily it is recommended to remove or close measure vehicle position within the lane detected or not detected at all. Obstacles boundaries. the trailer hitch assembly when the located above or below the sensors will not vehicle is not being used for towing. be detected when they are in close When one or both lane limits are proximity. detected and the vehicle passes over one without an activated turn signal, the The vehicle must be driven slowly when Warning! system emits a visual as well as an using the Park Sensors System in order to acoustic signal. be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver If the vehicle continues to go beyond the Before using the Park Sensors System, it looks over his/her shoulder when using the line of the lane without any intervention STARTING AND OPERATING is strongly recommended that the ball Park Sensors System. from the driver, the surpassed line will mount and hitch ball assembly is light up on the display (left or right) to disconnected from the vehicle when the urge the driver to bring the vehicle back vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles into the limits of the lane. or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Sensors System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Youare responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 176 System Activation/Deactivation The lane limit lines are visible at least on one side. Caution! The system is activated/deactivated by pushing the button located on the end of There are suitable visibility conditions. the multifunction lever. Do not tamper with nor operate on the The road is straight or with wide radius camera. Do not close the openings in the bends. aesthetic cover located under the interior A suitable distance is kept from the rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of the camera, contact your authorized dealer. vehicle in front. The camera may have limited or absent The turn signal is not active. operation due to weather conditions such Symbols And Messages On The Display as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield. The Lane Departure Warning system Camera operation may also be advises the driver when the vehicle compromised by the presence of dust, leaves the driving lane by showing condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, 07226S0001EM symbols and messages on the instrument by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are Lane Departure Warning System cluster display. driving not aligned with yours, vehicle Activation/Deactivation Button driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of Note: When the engine is started, the curvature), by road surface conditions and system maintains the operating mode by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). that was selected when it was turned Make sure the windshield is always clean. OFF. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera Activation Conditions operation may also be limited or absent in Once turned on, the system becomes some driving, traffic and road surface active only if the following conditions are conditions. met: If the windshield must be replaced due to The vehicle speed is above 37 mph 07226S0002EM scratches, chipping or breakage, contact (60 km/h) (the system is deactivated at Vehicle Changing Lanes exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is speeds equal to or greater than 110 mph advisable to replace the windshield if it is (180 km/h). damaged in the area of the camera.

177 When the system is active and the lane Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both limits have not been detected, the display Limits shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey When the system is active, both lane lines lines. on the display illuminate in white to indicate the successful detection of both limits.

07226S0003EM Left Lane Limit Detected When the system detects that the vehicle has approached the lane line and is about 07226S0007EM to pass it, the left line on the display Lane Limits Not Detected STARTING AND OPERATING illuminates in yellow. Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A 07226S0005EM Single Limit Both Lane Limits Detected When the system is active and only, for When lane limits are detected, the example, the left lane limit has been system is ready to provide indications in detected, the detected lane illuminates in case the driver unintentionally leaves the white on the display. The system is then lane (turn signal not activated). ready to provide visual warnings on the As the Lane Departure Warning system display in the event of unintentional detects the lane limits while the vehicle is exiting of the lane (turn signal not in motion, it will adjust the display activated) to the left. accordingly (from white to yellow and

07226S0004EM yellow to white, and increase their Left Lane Limit Approached thickness). The system operates in the same way, but mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane when only the right lane limit has been detected.

178 Limited Operation Warning REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / If a message appears on the display, a DYNAMIC GRIDLINES condition limiting the Lane Departure Description Warning system operation may have occurred. This could be an obstruction of The Rear Back-Up Camera is located on the camera view, or a fault in the system. the liftgate, above the rear license plate. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield by the interior rear view mirror. Although the vehicle can still be driven in 07226S0006EM normal conditions, the system may not Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by When the conditions limiting the system an audible signal as well as the visual are corrected, it will go back to normal indication in the instrument cluster. The operation. Should a fault persist, contact signal is emitted through the speakers on an authorized dealer. the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning 07186V0001EM crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding Rear Back-Up Camera Location If the system turns off and appears on the left line of the lane, the audible signal the display, it means that there is a When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the will come from the speakers on the left of system fault. Information and Entertainment System the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the display will show the area behind the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact an vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up The system's sensitivity can be set authorized dealer as soon as possible. Camera, along with a warning message. through the Information and Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be selected. To access the function, from the main menu select the following in order: 1. “Settings.” 2. “Safety.” 3. “Lane Departure Warning.”

4. “Sensitivity.” 07186V0002EM Rear Back-Up Camera Display 179 Rear Back-Up Camera Features Distance From The To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera Caution! Area features, select “Settings” from the Main Rear Of The Vehicle Menu of the Information and 0–11.8 inches Red Entertainment System. Under “Driver To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up (0–30 cm) Assistance”, Rear Back-Up Camera Camera should only be used as a parking 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet features can be selected: aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to Yellow view every obstacle or object in your drive (30 cm–1 m) View path. 3.3 feet or more Green Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must (1mormore) Dynamic Grid Lines be driven slowly when using the Rear Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time Messages On The Display Selecting “View” will activate the camera when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended If the liftgate is opened, the camera will view on the display. that the driver look frequently over his/her not detect any obstacle behind the Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up vehicle. The display will show a dedicated Camera. camera view to remain on the display warning message. STARTING AND OPERATING shortly after the vehicle is no longer in Make sure the liftgate is closed by REVERSE, followed by the previously Symbols And Messages On The Display pushing next to the lock until it clicks. active screen. Indications On The Display Important Notes Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will Through the Information and activate the display of the dynamic Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the Entertainment System settings, by camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is guidelines that indicate the route of the activating the "Camera Guidelines" vehicle. important to keep the camera surface feature, guidelines can be seen on the clean, and free from debris. rear camera display. If activated, the guidelines are positioned on the image to When parking, be aware of obstacles Warning! highlight the width of the vehicle and the that may be above or below the camera expected reverse path based on the range. Drivers must be careful when backing up steering wheel position. even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. The various colored areas indicate the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, distance from the rear of the vehicle. and be sure to check for pedestrians, A central line indicates the center of the animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. Youare vehicle to assist in rear parking responsible for the safety of your maneuvers or trailer hitch alignment. surroundings and must continue to pay The table below shows the approximate attention while backing up. Failure to do so distances for each area: can result in serious injury or death. 180 REFUELING THE VEHICLE Opening The Fuel Filler Door Refueling The Vehicle To refuel proceed as follows: Before refueling, make sure that the fuel 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on type is correct. the point shown by the arrow. Also, stop the engine before refueling. Note: An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus contributing to air pollution.

Caution! 07206V0002EM Fuel Door Label Emergency Fuel Door Opening Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even in small amounts in an emergency, as In the event of an emergency, the fuel filler door can be opened from inside the this would damage the catalytic converter 07206V0001EM beyond repair. Fuel Door liftgate. Proceed as follows: 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. Refueling Capacity Models With Compact Spare Tire 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the To ensure that you fill the tank filler pipe. 1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load completely, top off twice after the first floor. click of the fuel nozzle. 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts Further top-off could cause faults in the off, before removing the nozzle, wait for fuel feeding system. at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank. Refueling Procedure The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten central door locking system is unlocked. the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear It is automatically locked when the one click. This is an indication that cap is central locking system is applied. properly tightened. The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline). 04206V0004EM Load Floor

181 2. Unlock the locking device and remove 4. Open the fuel door by pressing it. 3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door the compact spare tire to reach the Models Without Compact Spare Tire lock. emergency opening cable on the side of the fuel door. 1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load floor.

08066V0010EM Cargo Area 0604132234US STARTING AND OPERATING Load Floor 1 — Locking Device 2. Lift up the cover to reach the emergency opening cable on the side of 3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door the fuel door. lock.

07226V0043EM Cargo Box Opened 2 — Release Cable

4. Open the fuel door by pressing it.

07226V0041EM 07266V0044EM Cargo Box Release Cable 1 — Cover 1 — Release Cable 182 VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Warning! Certification Label The GAWR is the maximum permissible As required by National Highway Traffic load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so Never have any smoking materials lit in or Safety Administration regulations, your near the vehicle when the fuel door is open vehicle has a certification label affixed to that the GAWR of each axle is not or the tank is being filled. the driver's side door or pillar. exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the Never add fuel when the engine is running. This label contains the month and year of This is in violation of most state and federal manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight components in the system with the fire regulations and may cause the MIL to Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating lowest load carrying capacity (axle, turn on. (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or Identification Number (VIN). A suspension components sometimes A fire may result if gasoline is pumped specified by purchasers for increased into a portable container that is inside of a Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place included on this label and indicates the durability does not necessarily increase gas containers on the ground while filling. Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The the vehicle's GVWR. bar code that appears on the bottom of Tire Size Note: If the filler compartment is the label is your VIN. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification washed with a pressure washer, keep it at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). Label represents the actual tire size on (GVWR) your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, Rim Size passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum This is the rim size that is appropriate for capacities of front and rear axle systems the tire size listed. (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Inflation Pressure GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up Payload to full GAWR. The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

183 Curb Weight Improper weight distributions can have TRAILER TOWING an adverse effect on the way your vehicle The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as steers and handles and the way the In this section you will find safety tips and the total weight of the vehicle with all brakes operate. information on limits to the type of fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full towing you can reasonably do with your capacity conditions, and with no vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully occupants or cargo loaded into the Caution! review this information to tow your load vehicle. The front and rear curb weight as efficiently and safely as possible. values are determined by weighing your Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited vehicle on a commercial scale before any GVWR or the maximum front and rear Warranty coverage, follow the occupants or cargo are added. GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can requirements and recommendations in break, or it can change the way your vehicle this manual concerning vehicles used for Loading handles. This could cause you to lose control. trailer towing. Also overloading can shorten the life of your The actual total weight and the weight of Common Towing Definitions the front and rear of your vehicle at the vehicle. ground can best be determined by The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in STARTING AND OPERATING weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. understanding the following information: The entire vehicle should first be weighed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating on a commercial scale to insure that the (GVWR) GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the The GVWR is the total allowable weight vehicle should then be determined of your vehicle. This includes driver, separately to be sure that the load is passengers, cargo and tongue weight. properly distributed over the front and The total load must be limited so that you rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to that the GAWR of either the front or rear “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification axles has been exceeded but the total Label” in “Starting And Operating” for load is within the specified GVWR. If so, further information. weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) specified weight limitations are met. The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus Store the heavier items down low and be the weight of all cargo, consumables, and sure that the weight is distributed equipment (permanent or temporary) equally. Stow all loose items securely loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded before driving. and ready for operation" condition. 184 The recommended way to measure GTW Trailer Frontal Area positively to tow vehicle and trailer is to put your fully loaded trailer on a stability. Trailer sway control and a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the The frontal area is the maximum height weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch trailer must be supported by the scale. multiplied by the maximum width of the are recommended for heavier Tongue front of a trailer. Weights (TW) and may be required Gross Combination Weight Rating Weight-Carrying Hitch depending on vehicle and trailer (GCWR) configuration/loading to comply with A weight-carrying hitch supports the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GCWR is the total allowable weight trailer tongue weight, just as if it were requirements. of your vehicle and trailer when weighed luggage located at a hitch ball or some in combination. other connecting point of the vehicle. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) These kinds of hitches are the most Warning! popular on the market today and they are The GAWR is the maximum capacity of commonly used to tow small and medium the front and rear axles. Distribute the sized trailers. An improperly adjusted Weight load over the front and rear axles evenly. Distributing Hitch system may reduce Make sure that you do not exceed either Weight-Distributing Hitch handling, stability, braking performance, front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle and could result in a collision. A weight-distributing system works by Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in applying leverage through spring (load) Weight Distributing Systems may not be “Starting And Operating” for further compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. bars. They are typically used for heavier information. Consult with your hitch and trailer loads to distribute trailer tongue weight manufacturer or a reputable Recreational to the tow vehicle's front axle and the Vehicle dealer for additional information. Warning! trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering Trailer Hitch Classification It is important that you do not exceed the more consistent steering and brake The following chart provides the industry maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous control thereby enhancing towing safety. driving condition can result if either rating is standard for the maximum trailer weight exceeded. Youcould lose control of the The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway a given trailer hitch class can tow and vehicle and have a collision. control also dampens sway caused by should be used to assist you in selecting traffic and crosswinds and contributes the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Tongue Weight (TW) The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. Youmust consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. 185 Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards ClassI-LightDuty 2,000lbs(907kg) Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the “TrailerTowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/Transmission Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note) 2.0L Engine 3,000 lbs (1360 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

186 Trailer And Tongue Weight The weight of the driver and all Safety chains must always be used passengers. Never exceed the maximum tongue between your vehicle and trailer. Always weight stamped on your bumper or trailer Note: Remember that everything put connect the chains to the frame or hook into or on the trailer adds to the load on retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the hitch. chains under the trailer tongue and allow your vehicle. Also, additional enough slack for turning corners. factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be Vehicles with trailers should not be considered as part of the total load on parked on a grade. When parking, apply the your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the Loading Information” placard for the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels. maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. GCWR must not be exceeded. Towing Requirements Total weight must be distributed 0601085399US between the tow vehicle and the trailer Weight Distribution To promote proper break-in of your new such that the following four ratings are vehicle drivetrain components, the not exceeded: following guidelines are recommended: 1. GVWR Caution! 2. GTW 3. GAWR Warning! Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of utilized. the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Improper towing can lead to a collision. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in Follow these guidelines to make your trailer the rear can cause the trailer to sway towing as safe as possible: Caution! severely side to side which will cause loss of Make certain that the load is secured in control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to the trailer and that it will not shift during load trailers heavier in front is the cause of travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully Do not tow a trailer at all during the first many trailer collisions. secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is could lose control of your vehicle and have a driven. The engine, axle or other parts could Consider the following items when collision. be damaged. computing the weight on the rear axle of Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) the vehicle: When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. that a trailer is towed, do not drive over The tongue weight of the trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at poor performance, or damage to brakes, full throttle. This helps the engine and other The weight of any other type of cargo axle, engine, transmission, steering, parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier or equipment put in or on your vehicle. suspension, chassis structure, or tires. loads. 187 Towing Requirements — Tires An electronically actuated trailer Towing Requirements — Trailer brake controller is required when towing Lights And Wiring Do not attempt to tow a trailer while a trailer with electronically actuated using a compact spare tire. brakes. When towing a trailer equipped Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of Do not drive more than 50 mph with a hydraulic surge actuated brake the trailer size, stoplights and turn (80 km/h) when towing while using a full system, an electronic brake controller is signals on the trailer are required for size spare tire. not required. motoring safety. Trailer brakes are recommended for The TrailerTow Package may include a Proper tire inflation pressures are four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a essential to the safe and satisfactory trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of factory approved trailer harness and operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” connector. in “Servicing And Maintenance” for 2,000 lbs (907 kg). proper tire inflation procedures. Note: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness. Check the trailer tires for proper tire Warning! The electrical connections are all inflation pressures before trailer usage. complete to the vehicle but you must Check for signs of tire wear or visible mate the harness to a trailer connector. STARTING AND OPERATING tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer Do not connect trailer brakes to your Refer to the following illustrations. vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” Note: for the proper inspection procedure. overload your brake system and cause it to fail. Youmight not have brakes when you Disconnect trailer wiring connector need them and could have an accident. When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in from the vehicle before launching a boat “Servicing And Maintenance” for the Towing any trailer will increase your (or any other device plugged into proper tire replacement procedures. stopping distance. When towing, you should vehicle’s electrical connect) into water. Replacing tires with a higher load allow for additional space between your carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Be sure to reconnect once clear from vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. Failure to do so could result in an accident. water area. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes Caution! Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs vehicle with that of the trailer. This could (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own cause inadequate braking and possible brakes and they should be of adequate personal injury. capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. 188 TowingTips Cooling System Before setting out on a trip, practice To reduce potential for engine and turning, stopping, and backing up the transmission overheating, take the trailer in an area located away from following actions: heavy traffic. City Driving Automatic Transmission In city traffic — while stopped, place Select the DRIVE range when towing. The the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. 0601085400US transmission controls include a drive Four-Pin Connector strategy to avoid frequent shifting when Highway Driving towing. However, if frequent shifting Reduce speed. 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park does occur while in DRIVE, you can use 2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn the AutoStick shift control to manually Temporarily turn off air conditioning. 3 — Ground 6 — Right select a lower gear. Installing The Receiver Stop/Turn Note: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading To properly install the receiver, follow the conditions will improve performance and directions below: extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This 1. Retrieve the receiver from the action will also provide better engine luggage compartment. braking. 2. Push the receiver into the trailer hitch, Speed Control — If Equipped and secure by inserting the locking pin into the trailer hitch. Do not use on hilly terrain or with 3. Insert the safety split ring into the heavy loads. hole on the locking pin. When using the speed control, if you 0601085401US experience speed drops greater than Seven-Pin Connector 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you 1 — Battery 5 — Ground can get back to cruising speed. 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn Use speed control in flat terrain and 3 — Right 7 — Running with light loads to maximize fuel Stop/Turn Lamps efficiency. 4 — Electric Brakes 189 Note: Ensure that the locking pin is Connecting The Electrical System Removing The Receiver removed from the trailer hitch before To connect the trailer’s electrical system, When the receiver is no longer needed, installing the receiver. follow the directions below: disconnect the electrical connections and remove it from its position using the 1. Remove the socket protective cover. directions below: 2. Completely insert the plug into the 1. Remove the safety split ring from the socket. locking pin. 2. Pull the locking pin out of the trailer hitch. 3. Remove the receiver from the trailer hitch.

07216V0013EM Trailer Hitch And Receiver STARTING AND OPERATING 1 – Receiver 3 – Safety Split Ring 07216V0014EM 2 – Locking Pin A – Trailer Hitch Electrical Tow Connector

Pin Function Number 1 Lights ground (Lights GND) Position light, side marker 2 lights, and license plate light 3 Left turn signal and stop light Right turn signal and stop 4 light

190 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING Climate Control System Max. Speed Saving Fuel Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant Below are some suggestions which may ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and help you save fuel and lower the amount outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both of harmful emissions released into the fuel consumption and emissions. atmosphere. Devices For Aerodynamic Control Acceleration Vehicle Maintenance The use of non-certified devices for Checks and operations should be carried aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects out in accordance with the Maintenance affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual and should not exceed Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in Driving Style "Servicing And Maintenance" for further the maximum torque. Starting information. Conditions Of Use Do not warm up the engine at low or high Tires revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Check the tire pressures at least once causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will every four weeks: if the pressure is too slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum low, consumption levels increase as consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a resistance to rolling is higher. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption Note: Tire pressure that is too high can immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) cause premature tire wear, reduced speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. warm up more quickly. control, etc. Traffic And Road Conditions Unnecessary Loads Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy Do not travel with an overloaded liftgate. Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in The weight of the vehicle and its lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or arrangement greatly affect fuel action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding consumption and stability. increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces pollution. also adversely affect consumption. Electric Devices Use electrical systems only for the Gear Selection Stops In Traffic amount of time needed. The rear window Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway defroster, additional headlights, conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings), turn off the engine. windshield wipers and heater blower fan faster acceleration will increase fuel require a considerable amount of energy; consumption. Improper use of a high gear increasing the current uptake increases increases consumption, emissions and fuel consumption (by up to +25% when engine wear. city driving). 191 This page is intentionally left blank

192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....194 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 194 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 199 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING. . . .206 The section on emergencies can help you TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED. .209 to deal with critical situations JUMP STARTING ...... 212 independently. ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 214 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .215 call the phone number found in the TOW EYES ...... 217 Warranty Book. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Youmay also consider contacting an SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 218 authorized dealer. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .218

193 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BULB REPLACEMENT The Hazard Warning flasher switch is Caution! General Instructions located in the switch bank below the Before replacing a bulb, check the radio screen. Prolonged use of the hazard warning contacts for oxidation. Push the switch once to flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. turn the hazard warning Replace blown bulbs with others of the flasher on. When the same type and power. Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System switch is activated, all After replacing a headlight bulb, directional turn signals The PBA system is designed to improve always check its alignment. will flash on and off to the vehicle’s braking capacity during warn oncoming traffic emergency braking. When a light is not working, check that of an emergency. Push the switch a For further details about the Panic Brake the corresponding fuse is intact before second time to turn the hazard warning Assist System, refer to the "Active changing the bulb. For the location of flashers off. Safety Systems" section in the "Safety" fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY This is an emergency warning system and chapter. Note: In some particular climate it should not be used when the vehicle is conditions, such as low temperature, in motion. Use it when your vehicle is humidity, or after washing the vehicle, a disabled and is creating a safety hazard thin condensation layer may form on the for other motorists. internal surfaces of the front and rear When you must leave the vehicle to seek headlights. This condensation will assistance, the hazard warning flashers disappear after switching on the will continue to operate even though the headlights. ignition is cycled to STOP.

08016V0001EM Hazard Warning Switch 194 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

195 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators (*) PY24W 24W Rear Fog lights(*) H11 55 W Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL) H15 55/15W (*) Dipped beam headlights (*) H7 55W Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Glove compartment light W5W 4W Liftgate light W5W 5W Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W (*) Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights

196 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is Warning! locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. Only replace bulbs when the engine is off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to Front Light Cluster With Main Beam prevent the risk of burns. Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights To replace the bulbs of the main beam headlights, contact an authorized dealer. Front Light Cluster 08026V0006EM Direction Indicators Protective Cover Caution! Proceed with the directions below to 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly change bulbs: counterclockwise, and then slide it off the headlight body. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. 1. Operating inside the engine Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb compartment, locate the protective life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily cover. surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

08026V0007EM Bulb/Connector

08026V0023EM 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the Protective Cover Location bulb holder. 2. Remove protective cover. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

197 Replacing Interior Bulbs 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights using a suitable tool. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: 1. Open the liftgate, and remove the liftgate lamp assembly using a suitable 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the tool. lens, using a suitable tool.

08026V0009EM Courtesy Lamp Indent IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Open protective cover up and remove the bulb pulling out of the connector. 08026V0010EM 08026V0008EM Ceiling Light Indent Sun Visor 2. Open protective cover up and remove 1 — Mirror Cover the bulb pulling out of the connector. 2 — Lens

2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened between the contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it first on one 08026S0011EM side and then pressing on the other side Cover And Bulb Removal Direction until it clicks into place. 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is Glove Compartment Light correctly inserted fully. 08026S0011EM To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 1. Open the glove compartment. 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is on one side and then pressing on the correctly inserted fully. other side until it clicks into place. 198 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 2. Open protective cover up and remove FUSES the bulb pulling out of the connector. 5. Install liftgate lamp in the correct General Information position, inserting it first on one side, and The fuses protect electrical systems then pressing on the other side until it against excessive current. clicks into place. When a device does not work, you must Puddle Lights On Door Panel check the electrical circuit inside of the To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power 1. Open the door and remove the puddle outlets for extended periods of time with light assembly, using a suitable tool. the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it 08026V0012EM Puddle Light Indent clicks into place. 08036S0001EM Blade Fuses 1 — Electrical Circuit 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit

199 Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them, and extract the pliers pulling Warning! upwards. The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to When replacing a blown fuse, always use remove the different types of fuses an appropriate replacement fuse with the present in the vehicle: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

08036S0002EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses J-CASE Fuse may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — Electrical Circuit Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the ignition is off and that all the other cuit services are switched off and/or 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- disengaged. cuit 08036S0005EM If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Fuse Extracting Pliers an authorized dealer. Fuse Extracting Pliers 1 — MINI fuse If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked 2 — J-CASE fuse to the fuse box. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system After use, return the pliers to their proper blows, contact an authorized dealer. position by following the below procedures: Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing. Push downward on the pliers into their housing until they click into place.

08036V0053EM Fuse Box

200 Fuse Location 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box the panel pulling downward. The fuses, which can be replaced by the To access the fuses, proceed as follows: user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. luggage compartment. 2. Remove the control unit cover. Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the two buttons. 08036V0011EM Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel 08036V0014EM Control Unit The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. The fuses are freely accessible on the After replacing the fuse, make sure that control unit. panel and footboard are correctly locked. The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. 08036V0010EM After replacing a fuse, make sure that Release Buttons On Footboard you have closed the cover correctly.

1 — Footboard

201 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

202 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver’s side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, alarm, power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), doors F38 20 unlock, central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

203 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036V0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

204 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE Receiver module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40 Hi-Fi system F08 30 I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20 Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20 Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15 Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10 Tow bar (+15) F4 10

205 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Information And Usage Changing Procedure Precautions 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level Warning! Jack Information surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. The jack weighs 4.4 lb (2 kg). Do not attempt to change a tire on the The jack requires no adjustment. Warning! side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the The jack cannot be repaired, and in the danger of being hit when operating the jack event of a fault it must be replaced by Do not attempt to change a tire on the side or changing the wheel. another factory replacement. of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when Being under a jacked-up vehicle is No tool other than its extension lever operating the jack or changing the wheel. dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack may be fitted on the jack. and fall on you. Youcould be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle Jack Maintenance 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. that is on a jack. If you need to get under a

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY raised vehicle, take it to a service center Prevent any dirt from depositing on 3. Apply the electric park brake. where it can be raised on a lift. the "worm screw". 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. Never start or run the engine while the Keep the "worm screw" lubricated. 5. Cycle the ignition to STOP mode. vehicle is on a jack. Never modify the jack. The jack is designed to be used as a tool 6. Block both the front Conditions Of Non-Use Of The Jack for changing tires only. The jack should not and rear of the wheel be used to lift the vehicle for service Temperatures below −40°F (−40°C). diagonally opposite of purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a the jacking position. For On sandy or muddy ground firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery example, if changing the areas. On uneven ground right front tire, block the left rear wheel. On steep slopes in extreme weather General Instructions conditions. 7. Open the liftgate and lift up the load This vehicle can be equipped with a Tire In direct contact with the engine or for floor using the handle. Service Kit. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” for repairs under the vehicle further information. 8. Take the warning triangle and position it at a suitable distance from the vehicle As an alternative to the Tire Service Kit, On boats to warn oncoming vehicles. the vehicle may be purchased with a compact spare tire. Refer to “Changing Procedure” for further information.

206 9. Unscrew the locking plate and take out the compact spare tire and the air compressor.

09056V0001EM Jacking Point Indicators

08066V0010EM Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Caution! 1 — Locking Plate Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those 10. Remove the damaged wheel by using indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this the wheel wrench to loosen the bolts by vehicle. about one turn.

11. Position the jack under the vehicle, 08066V0013EM 14. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack near the wheel to be changed, taking care Jacking Location screw clockwise, using the swivel wrench. not to damage the plastic body panel. 2 — Extension Lever Raise the vehicle only until the tire just 3 — Wrench Head clears the surface and enough clearance 12. Lift the extension lever on the is obtained to install the compact spare wrench. 4 — Jack 5 — Lifting Block tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

13. Rotate the extension lever clockwise until the round pin on the jack Warning! engages in the hole in the lifting block located about six inches (15 cm) from the outside edge of the body. The lifting Raising the vehicle higher than necessary points are marked by triangles visible can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise on the plastic body panel. the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 207 15. Remove the five wheel bolts and take the wheel off. Warning! 16. Make sure the contact surfaces between compact spare tire and hub are clean so that the fastening bolts will not To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully come loose. until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to 17. Fit the compact spare tire by follow this warning may result in serious inserting the first wheel bolt for two injury. threads into the hole closest to the valve.

08066V0011EM To obtain a more accurate reading, it is Caution! Attaching Compressor To Tire advisable to check the pressure of the compact spare tire on the pressure 6 — Air Compressor gauge with the compressor off. 7 — Pressure Gauge IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Be sure to mount the spare tire with the Note: Do not stow the deflated tire in valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could 8 — Power Button the compact spare tire location. be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. The compressor was designed for 21. Inflate the compact spare tire to a inflating the compact spare tire. Do not pressure of 43.5 psi (3 bar). use it for inflating mattresses, rafts, etc. 18. Take the wheel wrench and tighten Note: Spare tires are intended for the wheel bolts. Note: If spare tire is over inflated, be sure to lower the psi in the tire to the temporary use only. 19. Inflate the compact spare tire by recommended amount by using the Have the full-sized tire repaired or removing the cap from its inflation valve deflation button on the air compressor. replaced, as soon as possible. and screwing on the compressor inflation hose fitting. 22. Operate the wheel wrench on the jack to lower the vehicle. Warning! 20. Make sure that the switch on the compressor is in the O (off) position, 23. Remove the jack. open the liftgate and insert the plug into A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a 24. Use the wheel wrench to fully the power socket in the cargo area, or on collision or hard stop could endanger the tighten the bolts, passing alternately occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the the center console and start the engine. from one bolt to the diagonally opposite jack parts and the spare tire in the places Place the on/off switch in the I (on) one. provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire position. repaired or replaced immediately.

208 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Description If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage area under the load platform. 1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair the tire safely. Youshould be as far as possible from the side of the 04206V0004EM 08066V0002EM road, and in a position that is not Load Floor Tire Service Kit Components dangerous for oncoming traffic. Turn on The Tire Service Kit consists of: 1 — Sealant Cartridge the hazard warning flashers, remove the Sealant cartridge containing the 2 — Filling Hose safety triangle from the luggage 3 — Adhesive Label compartment, and place it at a suitable sealing fluid 4 — Air Compressor distance from the vehicle to make other Filler Tube drivers aware of your presence. Air compressor, complete with Note: 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the pressure gauge and connectors wheel with the deflated tire) is in a The sealing fluid is effective with position that is near to the ground. This Adhesive label with the writing "Max. external temperatures of between will allow the tire repair kit hoses to reach 50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). the valve stem and keep the tire service position easily visible to the driver (eg. on The sealing fluid has an expiration kit flat on the ground. the dashboard) after repairing the tire date. An instruction pamphlet for reference 3. Place the gear selector in PARK (P). in prompt and correct use of the Tire Inflation Procedure 4. Apply the electric park brake and turn Service Kit, which must be then given to the engine OFF. the personnel dealing with the sealant-treated tire To access the Tire Service Kit, open the Warning! liftgate and lift the load floor. A pair of protective gloves Some adaptors, for inflating different Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of elements the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. 209 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in vehicle under the following circumstances: plenty of water and drink plenty of water. the center console, then start the engine. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician If the puncture in the tire tread is immediately. approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as If the tire has any damage from driving follows: with extremely low tire pressure. 1. Apply the electric park brake. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. 2. Connect the hose to the sealant If the wheel has any damage. cartridge containing the sealing liquid. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the If you are unsure of the condition of the filler tube and tighten the fitting on the tire or the wheel. 08066V0006EM tire valve. Inserting Plug Into Outlet

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat sources. 5. Start the compressor by placing the power switch in the on position (I). A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is 08066V0004EM harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately 1 — Sealant Cartridge 08066V0005EM with plenty of water if there is any contact 2 — Filler Hose Air Compressor with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon 4 — Air Compressor 7 — Power Switch as possible, if there is any contact with 5 — Hose clothing. 8 — Pressure Gauge 6 — Sealant Cartridge Connector Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire 3. Make sure the power switch of the Service Kit out of reach of children. If compressor is in the off position (O). 210 6. Inflate the tire to a pressure of at Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure least 32 psi (2.2 bar). Refer to “Tires” in Warning! The compressor can also be used to “Servicing And Maintenance” for more check and, if necessary, restore the tire information. In order to obtain a more pressure. precise reading, check the pressure value Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire on pressure gauge with the compressor repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired Proceed as follows: off. or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do 1. Make sure that the power switch is in not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is the O (off) position. 7. If the pressure is not at least 26 psi repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the warning can result in injuries that are serious 2. Connect the hose directly to the valve compressor from the valve and power or fatal to you, your passengers, and others on the tire to be inflated. outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards around you. Have the tire checked as soon as 3. Insert the plug into the socket in the approximately five tire turns in order to possible at your authorized dealer. passenger compartment or in the cargo distribute the sealing fluid inside the tire area and start the engine. evenly, and then repeat the inflation 11. Apply the adhesive label from the 4. Start the compressor by putting the operation. sealant bottle where it can be easily seen power switch to I (on). As soon as the 8. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles by the driver as a reminder that the tire correct pressure is reached, put the (8 km), stop, engage the electric park has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, power switch to O (off). brake, and recheck the tire pressure. as well as not to exceed the speed restriction for the treated tire. 9. If the pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see an authorized dealer. Warning! 10. If a pressure value of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) is detected, restore the correct Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker pressure (with engine running and to the padded area on the steering wheel. electric park brake engaged), and drive Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the immediately with great care to an padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not authorized dealer. 08066V0008EM operate (deploy) normally resulting in Air Compressor And Components serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or the 5 — Hose speedometer cannot be viewed. 7 — Power Switch 8 — Pressure Gauge Note: Only use original sealant 9 — PSI/BAR Button cartridges, which can be purchased at an authorized dealer. 211 If the tire is over inflated, reduce the JUMP STARTING pressure by pushing the PSI/BAR button and releasing it when the correct If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it pressure is reached. can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 08076V0006EM Remote Negative Post Location

Warning!

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or Do not connect the jumper cable to the property damage due to battery explosion. negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in Caution! serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system The positive post (+) can be accessed by voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to removing the cover, and opening the the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. protective flap.

Remote Battery Connection Posts The remote posts of the battery for jump starting can be found inside the engine compartment. The battery itself is located in the luggage compartment. The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. 212 Jump Starting Procedure Cable Connection Proceed as follows to perform a jump starting procedure: Warning! 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of Failure to follow this jump-starting the vehicle with the discharged battery procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Caution! 08076V0002EM 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the Protective Flap jumper cable to the negative (-) post of Failure to follow these procedures could the booster battery. result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged 4. Connect the opposite end of the vehicle. negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, place Warning! the gear selector to PARK, then cycle the ignition to OFF. Do not connect the jumper cable to the 2. Turn off all electrical features in the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. vehicle. 08076V000118 The resulting electrical spark could cause Remote Positive Post Location the battery to explode and could result in 3. If using another vehicle to jump start serious injury. Only use the specific ground To carry out the operation, you need to the battery, park the vehicle within the point, do not use any other exposed metal have the correct cables to connect to the jumper cables reach, apply the parking parts. battery of another vehicle or a portable brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. battery booster pack to the remote posts 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has of the discharged battery. Usually, these the booster battery, let the engine idle a Warning! cables have terminals at the ends and are few minutes, and then start the engine in identified by different sheath colors (red the vehicle with the discharged battery. If = positive, black = negative). Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as using a portable battery booster pack, this could establish a ground connection and before starting the vehicle, wait a few personal injury could result. seconds after completing the connection. 213 Cable Disconnection Bump Starting ENGINE OVERHEATING Once the engine is started, remove the Never jump start the engine by pushing, Engine overheating may occur in connection cables in reverse sequence, towing or coasting downhill. situations such as (but not limited to) as described below: Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an extreme environmental temperatures or frequent engine stops/starts. If the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the automatic transmission by pushing it. engine becomes overheated, the Engine jumper cable from the remote negative (-) TemperatureWarning Light in the post of the vehicle with the discharged Caution! instrument cluster will illuminate along battery. with a dedicated message. Refer to 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the "Warning Lights And Messages On The jumper cable from the negative (-) post of Failure to follow the directions in this Instrument Panel" in the "Getting To section will cause damage to the vehicle. the booster battery. Know YourInstrument Panel" for more Accessories plugged into the vehicle information. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s In any of the following situations, you can positive (+) jumper cable from the battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular IN CASE OF EMERGENCY reduce the potential for overheating by positive (+) post of the booster battery. phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long taking the appropriate action. enough without engine operation, the 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently On the highways — slow down. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of to degrade battery life and/or prevent the the vehicle with the discharged battery. engine from starting. In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not If frequent jump starting is required to increase engine idle speed. start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at Note: There are steps that you can take an authorized dealer. to slow down an impending overheat condition: Caution! If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power A/C off can help remove this heat. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular Youcan also turn the temperature phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long control to maximum heat, the mode enough without engine operation, the control to floor and the blower control to vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently high. This allows the heater core to act to degrade battery life and/or prevent the as a supplement to the radiator and aids engine from starting. in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 214 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Alarm System — If Equipped” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further Warning! This section describes procedures for information. towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. The operators of the assistance vehicle Youor others can be badly burned by hot must be informed with regard to the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from vehicle's minimum height from ground in your radiator. If you see or hear steam Caution! order to avoid contact between the ends coming from under the hood, do not open the of the bumpers with the equipment of the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. breakdown truck. Never try to open a cooling system pressure The vehicle should be transported with all cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed The following image illustrates the front hot. of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid and rear attachment corners of the towing with only the front (or rear) wheels vehicle, to be taken into consideration lifted. When towing with only the front (or when loading the vehicle on the Caution! rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging commercial towing vehicle. the body, it could damage the transmission. Do not use sling-type equipment when Driving with a hot cooling system could towing. Vehicle damage may occur. damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle When securing the vehicle to a flatbed the vehicle with the air conditioner turned truck, do not attach to front or rear off until the pointer drops back into the suspension components. Damage to your normal range. If the pointer remains on the vehicle may result from improper towing. “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remain released, while being towed. Note: Damage from improper towing is not 08126V0001EM If the cooling fan does not operate covered under the New Vehicle Limited Front And Rear Loading Angles while the engine is running, the engine Warranty. temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized dealer. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a If the engine continues to overheat or Anti-Lift Protection system, you will need frequently overheats, have the cooling to disable the system prior to towing by system inspected. The engine could be pushing the button located on the seriously damaged unless repairs are overhead console. Refer to ”Security made. Contact an authorized dealer. 215 AWD Models A — Front Loading Angle 21.7° B — Rear Loading Angle 18.3°

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a commercial towing vehicle.

Caution! IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

216 TOW EYES If the vehicle has been in an accident or Warning! has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools container located inside the luggage compartment for vehicle towing. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow Towing is meant only for short distances eyes. on a paved road surface. Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow 1. Unhook the cap on the front grille or straps may break or become disengaged, rear bumper (if equipped), pushing on the causing serious injury or death. 08136V0003EM upper part. Rear Tow Eye Cap Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing serious injury or death. in the luggage compartment and carefully clean the threaded housing on the vehicle before using it. 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about 11 turns). Note: The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the tow eye must not exceed 15°.

08136V0001EM Front Tow Eye Cap

08136V0002EM Work Angle Of Tow Cable

217 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) Caution! RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will The tow eye must be used exclusively for Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s roadside assistance operations. Only use systems performed under certain crash the tow eye with an appropriate device in Systems” in “Safety” for further accordance with the highway code (a rigid information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road short distance to the nearest service obstacle. location. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Systems” in “Safety” for further vehicles off the road or where there are information on the Event Data Recorder obstacles. (EDR).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 220 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 224 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 227 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 228 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 234 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 235 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .252 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 253 BODYWORK...... 254 INTERIORS ...... 255

219 SCHEDULED SERVICING Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate Correct servicing is crucial for your authorized dealer as soon as locks, cleanliness and lubrication of guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle possible). linkage. under the best conditions. Windshield washer fluid level. Visually inspect conditions of: engine, For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned transmission, pipes and hoses Tire inflation pressure and condition. a series of checks and services for your (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber vehicle at fixed intervals based on Operation of lighting system elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). distance and time, as described in the (headlights, direction indicators, hazard Check battery charge and battery fluid Scheduled Servicing Plan. warning lights, etc.). level (electrolyte). Before each service, it is always Operation of windshield Visually inspect conditions of the necessary to carefully follow the washing/wiping system and accessory drive belts. instructions in the Scheduled Servicing positioning/wear of wiper blades. Plan (e.g. periodically check level of Check and, if necessary, change engine fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and top off if required: oil and replace oil filter. Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized dealer according to a set time Engine oil level. Check and, if necessary, replace cabin schedule. If, during each operation, in air filter. addition to the ones scheduled, the need Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle Check and, if necessary, replace air SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner. repairs, these may be carried out with the following conditions: Severe Duty All Models owner’s explicit consent only. Dusty roads. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a required by the manufacturer. Failure to Short, repeated journeys less than dusty and off-road environment or is have them carried out may invalidate the 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside operated predominately at idle or only New Vehicle Limited Warranty. temperatures. very low engine RPM’s. This type of Youare advised to inform your Engine often idling or driving long vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. authorized dealer of any small operating distances at low speeds or long periods irregularities without waiting for the next of inactivity. service. In the event of a long period of Periodic Checks inactivity. Every month or every 600 miles The following checks must be carried out ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check more often than indicated in the and, if necessary, top off: Scheduled Servicing Plan: Engine coolant level. 220 Maintenance Plan (2.0L T4 MAir Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check the tire service kit recharge condition and expire date Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● and, if equipped, engine oil degradation (2) Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. (2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

221 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s) Change engine coolant ●

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3) Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ● Replace accessory drive belt/s (4) Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid (6)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles (16,000 km). (4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 222 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement * ●●

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). *The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

223 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels

2.0L T4 MAir Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

0904144086US

1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 –Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 3 – Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

224 Engine Oil The engine oil level can be seen on the Caution! Warning! instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by The oil level is not refreshed immediately on If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU the display after topping off. Consequently, the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with sequence: display and follow the procedure below. aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns! 1. “Apps” Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is 2. “My Car” Caution! removed to add oil to engine. Never run 3. “Oil Level” the engine with cap removed this could Check on the display using the 6 notches cause oil to leak from engine. The oil level must never exceed the MAX that the oil level is between the MIN and Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update mark. MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches On Display MAX level. If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, If the oil level is close to or below the MIN to ensure the correct indication of the oil go to an authorized dealer as soon as mark, add oil gradually through the filler, level on the display, leave the vehicle on possible to have the oil in excess removed. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication flat ground with the engine running for Update On Display” in this section) Do not add oil with specifications approximately five minutes (temperature different from those of the oil already in the considering that each notch shown on the higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the engine. display corresponds to approximately engine off. Then, start the engine again, 8.8floz(250ml). Used engine oil and oil filters contain and idle it for about five minutes. substances which are harmful to the Note: If you have added the specified environment. To change the oil and filters, Caution! amount of oil and the indicator is not we advise you to contact an authorized reading “Full”, please contact an dealer. authorized dealer. Make sure not to add too much oil when topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess Engine Coolant Fluid may damage the engine. Have the vehicle If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of checked. Never exceed the MAX level when the reservoir and add the fluid described topping off engine oil. in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

225 Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Before performing any operation on Battery Headlights the electrical system, disconnect the The battery does not require the If the level is too low, remove reservoir negative battery cable. electrolyte to be topped up with distilled cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid If you wish to install electrical water. A periodic check carried out at an described in "Technical Specifications". accessories after purchasing the vehicle authorized dealer, however, is necessary Note: The headlight washing system will that require permanent electrical supply to check efficiency. not work if the liquid level is low (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which Follow the battery manufacturer's (situation indicated by the symbol on the influence the electrical supply instructions for maintenance. instrument cluster display). The requirements, contact your authorized Replacing The Battery windshield washer will keep working. dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate the overall electrical consumption. If necessary, replace the battery with Brake Fluid another original battery with the same Check that the fluid is at the maximum specifications. Follow the battery level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, Caution! manufacturer’s instructions for contact your authorized dealer to have maintenance. the system checked. If the charge level remains under 50% for a Automatic Transmission Activation long time, the battery may be damaged by System Oil sulphation, reducing its capacity and Warning! efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The transmission control oil level should also more prone to the risk of freezing (at only be checked at your authorized temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). Battery acid is a corrosive solution and dealer. can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or Useful Advice For Extending The Life Note: After the battery is disconnected, clothing. Do not lean over a battery when Of YourBattery the steering must be initialized. The attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or warning light on the instrument panel on skin, flush the area immediately with To avoid draining your battery and make switches on to indicate this. To carry out large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump it last longer, observe the following this procedure, simply turn the steering Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. instructions: wheel all the way from one end to the When you park the vehicle, ensure that other, and then turn it back to the central Battery gas is flammable and explosive. the doors and liftgate are closed properly position. Keep flame or sparks away from the to prevent any lights from remaining on battery. Do not use a booster battery or any inside the passenger's compartment. other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, touch each other. hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on Battery posts, terminals, and related for a long time when the engine is not accessories contain lead and lead running. compounds. Wash hands after handling. 226 Note: It will not be possible to open the BATTERY RECHARGING To reach the battery, remove the load liftgate with a key or by pressing the floor inside the liftgate. button in the passenger compartment Important Notes when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual liftgate Warning! opening strap on the liftgate lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in the “Liftgate Emergency Never charge or recharge a frozen Opening” procedure described in the battery: it may explode because of the “Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. Know YourVehicle”. At all times while charging or recharging the battery, make sure that any sparks or open flames are kept sufficiently far away from the battery. 04206V0004EM Load Floor Note: Locate the battery access panel under Before using the charging device, the load floor. always make sure that it is appropriate for the installed battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum 15 A). Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment. Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the 09036V0005EM vehicle battery. Battery Access Panel Remove the protective cover and Youcan recharge the battery without connect the positive cable terminal of the disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's charger (usually red) to the positive electrical system. terminal (+) of the battery.

227 Connect the negative terminal of the 2. When the battery is charged, turn the DEALER SERVICE charger (usually black) to nut next to the charger off before disconnecting it from The following pages contain instructions negative terminal (-) of the battery. the battery. on the required maintenance from the 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of technical personnel who designed the the battery charger and then the red vehicle. cable terminal. In addition to these specific maintenance instructions specified for routine 4. Refit the protective cover of the scheduled servicing, there are other positive terminal of the battery and the components which may require periodic access cover to the battery maintenance or replacement over the compartment. vehicle’s life cycle. Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is Engine Oil used with the battery fitted on the vehicle, before connecting it disconnect Engine Oil Level Check 09036V0002EM Battery both cables of the battery itself. Do not To ensure correct engine lubrication, the use a "quick-type" battery charger to oil must always be kept at the prescribed 1 — Protective Cover provide the starting voltage. level (see "Engine Compartment" in this 2 — Negative Post (Nut) chapter).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check the oil level at regular intervals, for The vehicle is equipped with an example every 1,864 miles (3,000 km). Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), which is Full operating temperature must be able to measure the charge and discharge reached. The vehicle must also be parked voltage and calculate the charge level on as level a surface as possible. and the general condition of the battery. The engine oil level can be checked using The sensor is placed next to the negative the Information and Entertainment terminal (-) of the battery. system. To access the function, activate For a correct charge/discharge the main menu (MENU button) and select procedure, the charge voltage must go the following options in sequence: through the IBS sensor. 1. “Applications” 1. Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on the user's manual to 2. “My Car” completely recharge the battery. 3. “Oil level”

228 Changing The Engine Oil Air Filter See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Replacing the Air Cleaner Warning! correct servicing intervals. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Choice Of Engine Oil Type correct servicing intervals. It is advised to Use only refrigerants and compressor To ensure optimal performance and replace it with a genuine spare part, lubricants approved by the manufacturer for maximum protection in all operating specifically designed for this vehicle. your air conditioning system. Some conditions, it is advised to use certified Air Conditioning System Maintenance unapproved refrigerants are flammable and engine oils. Refer to "Fluid And can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" To ensure the best possible performance, refrigerants or lubricants can cause the for further information. the air conditioning system must be system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer checked and undergo maintenance at an to Warranty Information Book, located in Additives For Engine Oil authorized dealer at the beginning of the your owner’s information kit, for further It is strongly recommended not to use summer. warranty information. additives (other than leak detection dyes) with the engine oil. Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Caution! The engine oil is a product designed Bodywork specially for the vehicle and its Ensure that the locks and bodywork performance may be deteriorated Do not use chemicals to clean the air junction points, including components through the use of further additives. conditioning system, since the internal such as the seat guides, door hinges (and components may be damaged. This kind of Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters damage is not covered by warranty. rollers), liftgate and hood are periodically For the disposal of the engine oil and lubricated with lithium-based grease to filters, contact the appropriate body to ensure correct, silent operation and to Replace The Cabin Air Filter determine local regulations. protect them from rust and wear. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Note: Used engine oil disposed of Thoroughly clean the components, correct servicing intervals. For cleaner incorrectly may seriously harm the eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. replacement, contact an authorized environment. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and dealer. grease. Also pay particular attention to Engine Oil Filter the hood closing devices, to ensure Replacing the Engine Oil Filter correct operation. During operations on the hood, to be carried out with the The engine oil filter must be replaced engine cold, also remember to check, each time the engine oil is changed. It is clean and lubricate the locking, release advised to replace it with a genuine spare and safety devices. part, specifically designed for this vehicle.

229 Lubricate the external lock barrels twice This function can only be activated within a year. Apply a small amount of two minutes of cycling the ignition to Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the STOP. lock barrel. To activate this function, move the lever If necessary, contact your authorized Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is upward for at least three seconds. dealer as soon as possible. a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather conditions. Windshield Wiper Periodically clean the windshield and rear Note: The life of the windshield wiper window and rubber profile of the blades varies according to the usage windshield wiper blades, using a sponge frequency. In any case, it is advised to or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive replace the blades approximately once a detergent. This eliminates the salt or year. When the blades are worn, noise, impurities accumulated when driving. marks on the glass or streaks of water Prolonged operation of the windshield may be noticed. In the presence of these window wipers with dry glass may cause conditions, clean the windshield wiper the deterioration of the blades, in blades or, if necessary, replace them. 0903142761US Windshield Wiper Stalk addition to abrasion of the surface of the Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades glass. To eliminate the impurities on the Function Deactivation SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ("Service Position" Function) dry glass, always operate the windshield The function is deactivated if: washers. The "service position" function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper In the event of very low outdoor More than two minutes passes before blades more easily. It is also temperatures, below 0 °F (-17.8 °C) , cycling the ignition to the STOP position recommended to activate this function ensure that the movement of the rubber after having raised the lever and putting when it is snowing and to make it easier part in contact with the glass is not the wipers into service position. to remove any dirt deposits in the area obstructed. Use a suitable deicing where the blades are normally The ignition is cycled to the ON and the product to release it if required. positioned, when washing. windshield wiper control is used. Avoid using the windshield wipers to Note: If the windshield wipers are raised If, after using the function, the ignition is remove frost or ice. while not in the “service position,” it is set back to ON with the blades in a Also avoid contact of the rubber profile possible to damage the hood. position other than rest position (at the of the blades with petroleum derivatives base of the windshield), they will only such as engine oil, gas, etc. Activation Of The Function return to rest position following a To activate this function, disable the command given using the stalk (stalk windshield wiper before cycling the upwards, into unstable position) or when ignition to STOP. a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. 230 Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades If an unusual noise from the exhaust or Proceed as follows: the presence of smoke in the passenger compartment is identified, or if the 1. Raise the wiper arm, push tab of the underbody or rear section of the vehicle attachment spring and remove the blade have been damaged, have the entire from the arm. exhaust system and adjoining bodywork areas checked at your authorized dealer to identify any components which are broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position. Open welding or loose connections may 09046V0003EM Front Windshield Washers permit exhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment. Have the exhaust system checked every time the vehicle is raised. Replace the components where necessary (for these

0604132236US operations, contact an authorized Wiper Release Tab dealer). In normal operating conditions, the 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in catalytic converter does not require the dedicated housing in the arm and maintenance. To ensure that it operates checking that it is locked. correctly, however, and prevent it from 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the getting damaged, it is extremely windshield. important that the engine operates perfectly. Note: Do not operate the windshield 09046V0004EM wiper with the blades lifted from the Rear Windshield Washer To minimize the risk of damaging the catalytic converter, proceed as follows: windshield. Then, check that the nozzle holes are not Front/Rear Windshield Washers clogged; use a needle to unblock them if Do not stop the engine or deactivate necessary. The window washer nozzles are fixed. If the ignition with gear engaged and vehicle in motion. there is no jet of fluid, first check that Exhaust System there is fluid in the reservoir. Refer to Do not attempt to start the engine by Adequate maintenance of the engine “Engine Compartment” in this chapter for bump starting. exhaust system represents the best the reservoir location. protection against leaks of carbon Do not persist in using the vehicle if monoxide into the passenger idling is very irregular or the operating compartment. conditions are very notably irregular. 231 When working near the radiator cooling With the engine off and at normal operating temperature, check that the Warning! fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is cooling system radiator cap is closed temperature controlled and can start at any properly. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They time the ignition is in the ON mode. contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can Coolant Check Warning! make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and they both need to be checked to ensure Do not open hot engine cooling system. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when you park over materials that can burn. Such the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or materials might be grass or leaves coming “Engine Compartment” section for the remove the cap to cool an overheated into contact with your exhaust system. Do locations. engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in not park or operate your vehicle in areas Check the engine coolant and intercooler the cooling system. To prevent scalding or where your exhaust system can contact coolant level every oil change or before injury, do not remove the pressure cap while anything that can burn. long trips. the system is hot or under pressure. If there are impurities in the engine Do not use a pressure cap other than the Cooling System coolant, the system must be drained, one specified for your vehicle. Personal flushed and refilled: contact an injury or engine damage may result. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE authorized dealer. Warning! Check the front part of the condenser to Note: Before removing the coolant check for any build-up of insects, leaves reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it down. Youor others can be badly burned by hot by spraying delicately with water. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam Check the hoses of the engine/ Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The coming from under the hood, do not open the intercooler cooling system to ensure that Engine/Intercooler Coolant hood until the radiator has had time to cool. the rubber has not deteriorated and that If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, Never open a cooling system pressure cap there are no cracks, tears, cuts or have cleaning and flushing carried out at when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. obstructions in the expansion tank side an authorized dealer. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry and radiator side connectors. Should See the "Maintenance Plan" for the away from the radiator cooling fan when the there be any doubt regarding leaks from correct servicing intervals. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are and may start at any time, whether the required), have the seal checked at an engine is running or not. authorized dealer.

232 Note: Disposal of Used Coolant foot on the brake pedal and don’t put unnecessary strain on it to prevent the For topping up, refer to "Fluids And Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is brakes from overheating. Excess pad Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" subject to legal requirements. Contact wear may cause damage to the braking for proper coolant specifications. the appropriate body to determine local regulations. system. Do not use pure water, alcohol-based When an insufficient oil level is coolants, corrosions inhibitors or Note: detected, contact an authorized dealer additional anti-rust products because To prevent the fluid from being to have the system checked. they may be incompatible with the ingested by children or animals, do not engine coolant and cause the clogging of keep it in open containers or pour it on Always keep the cap of the brake the radiator. The use of propylene the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor fluid reservoir (in the engine glycol-based coolant is also not immediately. Eliminate any traces of compartment) completely closed. recommended. fluid from the ground immediately. Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap When the vehicle stops after a short Warning! To prevent loss of engine coolant, make trip, steam may be seen coming out from sure that the expansion tank cap is front of the hood. This is a normal closed. If it is open, screw it completely phenomenon which is due to the Use only manufacturer's recommended until you reach/hear the click. presence of rain, snow or a lot of brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” Periodically check the cap and clean it moisture on the surface of the radiator. in “Technical Specifications” for further from any foreign bodies that may have information. Using the wrong type of brake With engine and system cold, do not fluid can severely damage your brake deposited on the external surface. top up with coolant beyond the system and/or impair its performance. The maximum level indicated on the proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is reservoir in the engine compartment. also identified on the original factory Warning! installed hydraulic master cylinder Braking System reservoir. To avoid contamination from foreign Never add coolant with the engine hot or In order to guarantee the efficiency of matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid overheated. the braking system, periodically check its components; for this operation, contact or fluid that has been in a tightly closed Do not attempt to cool an overheated an authorized dealer. container. Keep the master cylinder engine by loosening or removing the cap. reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake The heat causes a considerable increase in See the "Maintenance Plan" for the fluid in a open container absorbs moisture pressure in the cooling system. correct servicing intervals. from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly To prevent damage to the engine, only use Note: Driving with your foot resting on during hard or prolonged braking, resulting the engine cooling circuit caps provided. the brake pedal may compromise its in sudden brake failure. This could result in a efficiency, increasing the risk of collision. accidents. When driving, never keep your 233 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Frequency of Oil Changes RAISING THE VEHICLE result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine In normal vehicle operating conditions, it If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. is not necessary to change the authorized dealer which is equipped with Brake fluid can also damage painted and transmission oil. shop jacks or jack arms. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. The vehicle lifting points are marked on Caution! the side skirts with the symbols. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an partial or complete brake failure. This could authorized dealer immediately. Severe result in a collision. transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to Automatic Transmission adjust the fluid level accurately. Use only a transmission oil with the characteristics indicated in "Fluids and Replacing The Battery Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications". If necessary, replace the battery with another battery with the same Special Additives 09056V0001EM specifications. It is advised to contact an Do not use any type of additive with the Vehicle Lift Point Locations SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE authorized dealer for replacement. automatic transmission oil. The automatic transmission oil is a product Follow the battery manufacturer's designed specially for this vehicle and its instructions for maintenance. performance may be compromised through the use of further additives.

Caution!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

234 TIRES Note: Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. Tire safety information will cover aspects P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded of the following information: Tire into the sidewall preceding the size Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, designation. Example: P215/ Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire 65R15 95H. Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is Tire Markings based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the 0601085395US letters “LT” that are molded into the Tire Markings sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) Temporary high pressure compact spare 2 — Size 5 — Maximum tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded Designation Pressure into the sidewall preceding the size 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, designation. Example: T145/ Description Traction and 80D18 103M. Temperature High flotation tire sizing is based on Grades U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

235 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

236 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

237 Tire Identification Number (TIN) sidewalls will have the full TIN, including is not found on the outboard side, then the date code, located on the white you will find it on the inboard side of the The TIN may be found on one or both sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code on the outboard side of black sidewall may only be on one side. Tires with white tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

238 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for Cold Tire Inflation Pressure a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

239 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle Note: The proper cold tire inflation condition, gross axle weight ratings pressure is listed on the driver’s side (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's must not be exceeded. For further side door. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Check the inflation pressure of each tire, Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” including the spare tire (if equipped), at section of this manual. least monthly and inflate to the To determine the maximum loading recommended pressure for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the GUID-054900418-high.tif statement “The combined weight of Tire And Loading Information Placard occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire This placard tells you important and Loading Information placard. The information about the: combined weight of occupants, 1. Number of people that can be carried cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight in the vehicle. (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Steps For Determining Correct Load SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0806115150US 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Limit— 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the (1) Locate the statement “The front, rear, and spare tires. combined weight of occupants and Loading cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. The vehicle maximum load on the tire (2) Determine the combined weight must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You of the driver and passengers that will will not exceed the tire's load carrying be riding in your vehicle. capacity if you adhere to the loading (3) Subtract the combined weight of 0806115151US conditions, tire size, and cold tire Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) inflation pressures specified on the Tire the driver and passengers from XXX and Loading Information placard in kg or XXX lbs. “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

240 (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit available amount of cargo and For example, if “XXX” amount equals luggage load capacity. For example, 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity there will be five 150 lb passengers is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as in your vehicle, the amount of shown in step 4. available cargo and luggage load Note: capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred (5) Determine the combined weight to your vehicle. The following table of luggage and cargo being loaded on shows examples on how to calculate the vehicle. That weight may not total load, cargo/luggage, and towing safely exceed the available cargo and capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and luggage load capacity calculated in size of occupants. This table is for Step 4. illustration purposes only and may not (6) If your vehicle will be towing a be accurate for the seating and load trailer, load from your trailer will be carry capacity of your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult For the following example, the this manual to determine how this combined weight of occupants and reduces the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

241 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

GUID-054900419-high.tif

242 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Tread Wear Warning! cushion shock. Objects on the road and Improper cold tire inflation pressures can chuckholes can cause damage that result in cause abnormal wear patterns and tire failure. reduced tread life, resulting in the need Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overinflated or underinflated tires can for earlier tire replacement. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect affect vehicle handling and can fail Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle handling, and increase your stopping suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. distance. Use tires of the recommended load Proper tire inflation contributes to a capacity for your vehicle. Never overload Unequal tire pressures can cause steering comfortable ride. Over-inflation them. problems. Youcould lose control of your produces a jarring and uncomfortable vehicle. ride. Tires — General Information Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the Tire Inflation Pressures Tire Pressure vehicle to drift to the right or left. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. edge of the driver's side door. to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are At least once a month: affected by improper tire pressure: Both under-inflation and over-inflation Check and adjust tire pressure with a affect the stability of the vehicle and can Safety and Vehicle Stability good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. produce a feeling of sluggish response or Do not make a visual judgement when Economy over responsiveness in the steering. determining proper inflation. Tires may Tread Wear Note: look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Safety side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. visible damage. Unequal tire pressure from side to Warning! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or Caution! right. Improperly inflated tires are dangerous Fuel Economy After inspecting or adjusting the tire and can cause collisions. Underinflated tires will increase tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Underinflation increases tire flexing and rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. entering the valve stem, which could can result in overheating and tire failure. damage the valve stem.

243 Inflation pressures specified on the Tire Pressures For High Speed Recommended Cold Tire Inflation placard are always “cold tire inflation Operation Pressures pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is For vehicle speeds below 100 mph defined as the tire pressure after the The manufacturer advocates driving at (160 km/h), recommended cold tire vehicle has not been driven for at least safe speeds and within posted speed inflation pressures are listed on the Tire three hours, or driven less than 1 mile limits. Where speed limits or conditions And Loading Information Placard located (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of are such that the vehicle can be driven at on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge three hours. The cold tire inflation high speeds, maintaining correct tire of the driver's side door. inflation pressure is very important. pressure must not exceed the maximum When driving at speeds 100 mph Increased tire pressure and reduced inflation pressure molded into the tire (160 km/h) and above, increased tire vehicle loading may be required for sidewall. pressures and reduced vehicle loading high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to Check tire pressures more often if are required for high-speed vehicle your authorized tire dealer or original subject to a wide range of outdoor operation. equipment vehicle dealer for temperatures, as tire pressures vary with For driving speeds above 100 mph temperature changes. recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (160 km/h) recommended cold tire Tire pressures change by approximately inflation pressures are listed below 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air under "High Speed Tire Inflation temperature change. Keep this in mind Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must when checking tire pressure inside a Warning!

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + garage, especially in the Winter. three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) Example: If garage temperature = 68°F High speed driving with your vehicle under luggage). (20°C) and the outside temperature = maximum load is dangerous. The added 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Warning! pressure should be increased by 3 psi Youcould have a serious collision. Do not (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum every 12°F (7°C) for this outside capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). High speed driving with your vehicle under temperature condition. maximum load is dangerous. The added Tire pressure may increase from 2 to strain on your tires could cause them to fail. 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Youcould have a serious collision. NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

244 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure Front Rear Front Rear 30.5 psi 33.3 psi 210.3 kPa * 229.6 kPa * 225/65 R17 102V 17x7.5J 34.8 psi 240 kPa 37.7 psi 260 kPa 32 psi 220.6 kPa 34.8 psi 240 kPa ** ** 30.5 psi 33.3 psi 33.3 psi 235/65 R17 104V 17x8J 37.7 psi 260 kPa 210.3 kPa 229.6 kPa 229.6 kPa 30.5 psi 33.3 psi 33.3 psi 235/60 R18 103W 18x8J 37.7 psi 260 kPa 210.3 kPa 229.6 kPa 229.6 kPa 30.5 psi 33.3 psi 33.3 psi 235/55 R19 101Y 19x8J 37.7 psi 260 kPa 210.3 kPa 229.6 kPa 229.6 kPa 33.3 psi 36.3 psi 39.2 psi 255/45 R20 105V 20x8.5J 34.8 psi 240 kPa 229.6 kPa 250.3 kPa 270.3 kPa 195/75 R18 106P (Compact – 43.5 psi 300 kPa Spare Tire) For 225/65 R17 tires, in medium load conditions, there are two possible pressure settings depending on the mode required: comfort (*) and ECO (**). Restore the inflation pressures accordingly. ECO configuration consumption is not guaranteed with comfort configuration pressures Note: Using tires of a different size, type, brand or design on the front and rear may adversely affect vehicle driveability. We recommend using only tires approved by the manufacturer. The manufacturer cannot determine if unapproved tires are suitable for use and therefore cannot guarantee vehicle safety in those conditions.

245 Radial Ply Tires Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to Warning! Warning! drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is Combining radial ply tires with other types generated by excessive wheel speeds may referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run cause tire damage or failure. A tire could of tires on your vehicle will cause your Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could explode and injure someone. Do not spin cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph in sets of four. Never combine them with Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds other types of tires. mode it has limited driving capabilities continuously when you are stuck, and do not and needs to be replaced immediately. A let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run what the speed. Tire Repair flat tire is changed after driving with If your tire becomes damaged, it may be underinflated tire condition, please Tread Wear Indicators repaired if it meets the following criteria: replace the TPM sensor as it is not Tread wear indicators are in the original The tire has not been driven on when designed to be reused when driven under equipment tires to help you in flat. run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition. Note: TPM Sensor must be replaced determining when your tires should be The damage is only on the tread replaced. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE after driving the vehicle on a flat tire section of your tire (sidewall damage is condition. not repairable). It is not recommended driving a vehicle The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer an inch (6 mm). while a tire is in the run flat mode. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire See the tire pressure monitoring section repairs and additional information. for more information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires Tire Spinning that have experienced a loss of pressure

should be replaced immediately with When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice 0806104865NA another Run Flat tire of identical size and conditions, do not spin your vehicle's Tire Tread service description (Load Index and wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure longer than 30 seconds continuously 1 — Worn Tire sensor as well as it is not designed to be without stopping. 2 — New Tire reused.

246 These indicators are molded into the See the Tire Sizing Chart example found bottom of the tread grooves. They will in the “Tire Safety Information” section of Warning! appear as bands when the tread depth this manual for more information relating becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a When the tread is worn to the tread wear Tires and the spare tire should be replaced tire. indicators, the tire should be replaced. after six years, regardless of the remaining It is recommended to replace the two Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this tread. Failure to follow this warning can front tires or two rear tires as a pair. section for further information. result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose Replacing just one tire can seriously control and have a collision resulting in affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever serious injury or death. Life Of Tire replace a wheel, make sure that the The service life of a tire is dependent wheel’s specifications match those of the upon varying factors including, but not Note: Wheel Valve Stem must be original wheels. limited to: replaced as well when installing new tires It is recommended you contact an due to wear and tear in existing tires. authorized tire dealer or original Driving style. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place equipment dealer with any questions you Tire pressure - Improper cold tire with as little exposure to light as may have on tire specifications or inflation pressures can cause uneven possible. Protect tires from contact with capability. Failure to use equivalent wear patterns to develop across the tire oil, grease, and gasoline. replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your tread. These abnormal wear patterns will Replacement Tires reduce tread life, resulting in the need for vehicle. earlier tire replacement. The tires on your new vehicle provide a Distance driven. balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear Warning! Performance tires, tires with a speed and correct cold tire inflation pressures. rating of V or higher, and Summer tires The manufacturer strongly recommends Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, typically have a reduced tread life. that you use tires equivalent to the or speed rating other than that specified for Rotation of these tires per the vehicle originals in size, quality and performance your vehicle. Some combinations of scheduled maintenance is highly when replacement is needed. Refer to the unapproved tires and wheels may change recommended. paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in suspension dimensions and performance this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading characteristics, resulting in changes to Information placard or the Vehicle steering, handling, and braking of your Certification Label for the size vehicle. This can cause unpredictable designation of your tire. The Load Index handling and stress to steering and suspension components. Youcould lose and Speed Symbol for your tire will be control and have a collision resulting in found on the original equipment tire serious injury or death. Use only the tire and sidewall. wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. 247 Never use a tire with a smaller load index Spare Tire Matching Original Do not install more than one compact or capacity, other than what was originally Equipped Tire And Wheel — If spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Equipped given time. smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. Youcould lose Yourvehicle may be equipped with a control and have a collision. spare tire and wheel equivalent in look Warning! Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and function to the original equipment having adequate speed capability can result tire and wheel found on the front or rear in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may Compact and collapsible spares are for control. be used in the tire rotation for your temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have refer to an authorized tire dealer for the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to Caution! recommended tire rotation pattern. the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped follow the warnings, which apply to your Replacing original tires with tires of a The compact spare is for temporary spare. Failure to do so could result in spare different size may result in false tire failure and loss of vehicle control. speedometer and odometer readings. emergency use only. Youcan identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire Full Size Spare — If Equipped SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Spare Tires — If Equipped description on the Tire and Loading Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the The full size spare is for temporary Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please driver’s side door opening or on the emergency use only. This tire may look refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire like the originally equipped tire on the Emergency” for further information. descriptions begin with the letter “T” or front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is “S” preceding the size designation. not. This spare tire may have limited Example: T145/80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the Caution! tread wear indicators, the temporary use T, S = Temporary Spare Tire full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since this tire has limited tread life, the Because of the reduced ground clearance, Since it is not the same as your original do not take your vehicle through an original equipment tire should be equipment tire, replace (or repair) the automatic car wash with a compact or repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on original equipment tire and reinstall on limited use temporary spare installed. your vehicle at the first opportunity. the vehicle at the first opportunity. Damage to the vehicle may result. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact Limited Use Spare — If Equipped spare wheel, since the wheel is designed The limited use spare tire is for specifically for the compact spare tire. temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the 248 limited use spare wheel. This label and remember to always wash when the contains the driving limitations for this surfaces are not hot to the touch. Caution! spare. This tire may look like the original Yourwheels are susceptible to equipped tire on the front or rear axle of deterioration caused by salt, sodium your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, etc., and other road chemicals bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. handling. Since it is not the same as your used to melt ice or control dust on dirt These products may damage the wheel's original equipment tire, replace (or roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild protective finish. Such damage is not repair) the original equipment tire and soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use covered by the New Vehicle Limited reinstall on the vehicle at the first Warranty. Only car wash soap is harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can recommended. opportunity. damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. Note: If you intend parking or storing Warning! your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Caution! drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Limited use spares are for emergency use remove the water droplets from the only. Installation of this limited use spare brake components. This activity will tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, Avoid products or automatic car washes do not drive more than the speed listed on that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline remove the red rust on the brake rotors the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to additives or harsh brushes. Many and prevent vehicle vibration when the cold tire inflation pressures listed on aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic braking. your Tire and Loading Information Placard car washes may damage the wheel's Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the protective finish. Such damage is not rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace covered by the New Vehicle Limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the Warranty. Only car wash soap is Caution! first opportunity and reinstall it on your recommended. vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. If your vehicle is equipped with these When cleaning extremely dirty wheels specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel including excessive brake dust, care must cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care be taken in the selection of tire and wheel They will permanently damage this finish cleaning chemicals and equipment to and such damage is not covered by the New All wheels and wheel trim, especially prevent damage to the wheels. Select a Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH aluminum and chrome plated wheels, non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH should be cleaned regularly using mild aluminum or chrome wheels. A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain is all that is required to maintain this finish. their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle 249 Tire Types While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction Warning! All Season Tires — If Equipped capability on wet or dry surfaces may be All Season tires provide traction for all poorer than that of non-studded tires. seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice Some states prohibit studded tires; Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, therefore, local laws should be checked between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving before using these tire types. season tires can be identified by the M+S, too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Chains M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire It is possible to fit 13 mm chains on all sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets the tires except for R20. of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires affect the safety and handling of your Use of traction devices require sufficient vehicle. Some areas of the country require the tire-to-body clearance. Follow these use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow recommendations to guard against Summer Or Three Season Tires — If tires can be identified by a damage. Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. Note: Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires, Traction device must be of proper wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent size for the tire, as recommended by the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the traction device manufacturer. your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment Use on Rear Tires Only. tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four; Check the tension of the snow chains conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may after the first few metres have been vehicle when ambient temperatures are adversely affect the safety and handling driven. less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are of your vehicle. covered with ice or snow. For more Using snow chains with tires with Snow tires generally have lower speed information, contact an authorized non-original dimensions may damage ratings than what was originally equipped dealer. the vehicle. with your vehicle and should not be Summer tires do not contain the all operated at sustained speeds over Using different tires sizes or types season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above (M+S, snow, etc.) between the front and snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original rear axles may adversely affect vehicle Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer driveability, with the risk of losing failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, control of the vehicle and resulting safety and handling of your vehicle. loading and cold tire inflation pressures. accidents.

250 Tire Rotation Recommendations Tire rotation contributes to the preservation of the grip and traction Caution! Tires on the front and rear axles of performance on wet, muddy or snowy vehicles operate at different loads and roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability perform different steering, driving, and of the vehicle. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, braking functions. For these reasons, observe the following precautions: they wear at unequal rates. These effects In the case of irregular wear of the tires Because of restricted traction device can be reduced by timely rotation of identify the cause and correct it as soon clearance between tires and other tires. Rotation will increase tread life, as possible, by contacting an authorized suspension components, it is important that dealer. only traction devices in good condition are maintain traction levels and contribute to used. Broken devices can cause serious a smooth, quiet ride. The rotational direction of the tire must damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if To resolve this problem, tires should be be taken into consideration when noise occurs that could indicate device rotated at each service interval rotating the tires. The recommended breakage. Remove the damaged parts of (approximately every 10,000 miles rotation pattern for directional tires is the device before further use. [16,000km]). More frequent rotation is shown below. Install device as tightly as possible and permissible if desired. The reasons for then retighten after driving about ½ mile any rapid or unusual wear should be (0.8 km). corrected prior to rotation being Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). performed. Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns Equipped and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Due to different size tires and wheels on front and rear axles tire rotation is not Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry possible for: pavement. 2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a Observe the traction device different front and rear tire size. 09066V0002EM manufacturer’s instructions on the method Tire Rotation of installation, operating speed, and It is recommended to avoid situations conditions for use. Always use the Caution! suggested operating speed of the device with a large difference in wear between manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph the front and rear tires and to strictly use (48 km/h). Damage to the vehicle may occur if different winter tires of the sizes given on the tire placard. Do not use traction devices on a compact front and rear tire sizes are rotated spare tire.

251 The AWD system and the original tires DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road are developed together to ensure the TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. vehicle’s best performance. When TIRE QUALITY GRADES changing the tires, it is recommended to Traction Grades The following tire grading categories us the same “AR” marked tires, to The Traction grades, from highest to maintain the same level of performance were established by the National lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These and component life. Highway Traffic Safety grades represent the tire's ability to Administration. The specific grade stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's under controlled conditions on manufacturer in each category is specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. marked C may have poor traction All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Warning!

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 252 laboratory test wheel. Sustained high STORING THE VEHICLE Cover the vehicle with a fabric or temperature can cause the material If the vehicle is left inactive for longer perforated plastic sheet, paying of the tire to degenerate and reduce than a month, the following precautions particular care not to damage the painted should be observed: surface by dragging any dust that may tire life, and excessive temperature have accumulated on it. Do not use can lead to sudden tire failure. The Park the vehicle in an area that is compact plastic sheets, as they do not grade C corresponds to a level of covered and dry, and well-ventilated if allow humidity to evaporate from the performance, which all passenger possible. Slightly open the windows. surface of the vehicle. vehicle tires must meet under the Check that the electric park brake is Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) Federal Motor Vehicle Safety not activated. above the standard prescribed pressure Standard No. 109. Grades B and A Carry out the “Liftgate Emergency and check it periodically. represent higher levels of Opening” procedure described in the Do not drain the engine cooling performance on the laboratory test “Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To system. Know YourVehicle”. wheel, than the minimum required by Any time the vehicle is left inactive for law. Disconnect the negative battery two weeks or more, operate the air terminal and check the battery charge. conditioning system with engine idling Repeat this check once every three for at least five minutes, setting external Warning! months during storage. air and with fan set to maximum speed. If the battery is not disconnected from This operation will ensure appropriate lubrication for the system, thus The temperature grade for this tire the electrical system, check its state of charge every thirty days. minimizing the possibility of damage to is established for a tire that is the compressor when the system is properly inflated and not Clean and protect the painted parts operated again. using protective wax. overloaded. Excessive speed, Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP under-inflation, or excessive Clean and protect the shiny metal and having closed the driver side door, loading, either separately or in parts using special compounds available wait at least one minute before commercially. combination, can cause heat disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the buildup and possible tire failure. Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift electrical supply to the battery, make them off the glass. sure that the ignition is in the STOP position and the driver’s side door is closed.

253 BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently Paint Protection Against Atmospheric rinsing the sponge. Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of Rinse well with water and dry with a The vehicle is equipped with the best leather chamois. available technological solutions to rust. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door These include: washing the vehicle: the frequency frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with depends on the conditions and special care, as water may stagnate more Painting products and systems which environment where the vehicle is used. easily in these areas. Do not wash the give the vehicle resistance to corrosion For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or and abrasion. vehicle more often in areas with high with the hood hot: this may alter the shine Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) levels of atmospheric pollution or salted of the paintwork. steel sheets, with high resistance to roads. Note: Avoid parking under trees; the corrosion. Some parts of the vehicle may be resin dropped by trees makes the covered with a matte paint which, in paintwork go opaque and increases the Spraying of plastic parts, with a order to be maintained intact, requires possibility of corrosion. protective function in the more exposed special care. Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. To correctly wash the vehicle, follow the same way as the rest of the vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Use of “open” boxed sections to these instructions: If washing the vehicle in a service that prevent condensation and pockets of If high pressure jets or cleaners are moves the vehicle, for vehicles with moisture which could favor the formation used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance automatic transmissions, proceed with of rust inside. of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the the following directions: Use of special films to protect against bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Ensure that the vehicle is on a flat abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, Build up of water could cause damage to surface doors, etc.). the vehicle in the long term. Disable the automatic engagement of Corrosion Warranty To make it easier to remove any dirt the parking brake (refer to the “Electric deposits in the area where the blades are Park Brake” in “Starting And Operating” Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion normally located it is recommended to for further information). Warranty against perforation due to rust position the windshield wipers vertically of any original element of the structure (service position), for more information, With the vehicle stationary, the gear in or bodywork. For the general terms of refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. NEUTRAL (N) and the brake pedal this warranty, refer to the Warranty depressed, push the START button. Booklet. Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water if possible. Note: The vehicle will remain in NEUTRAL (N) for 15 minutes before PARK (P) will be engaged automatically. 254 Windows Engine Compartment INTERIORS Use specific detergents and clean cloths At the end of every winter, wash the Periodically check the cleanliness of the to prevent scratching or altering the engine compartment thoroughly, taking interior, beneath the mats, which could transparency. care not to aim the jet of water directly at cause oxidation of the sheet metal. the electronic control units or at the windshield wiper motors. Have this Seats And Fabric Parts Caution! operation performed at a specialized Remove dust with a soft brush or a workshop. vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a Wipe the rear window inside gently with a Note: The washing should take place moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the cloth following the direction of the filaments with the engine cold and the ignition seats with a sponge moistened with a to avoid damaging the heating device. device in the STOP position. After the solution of water and neutral detergent. washing operation, make sure that the Leather Seats Front Headlights various protections (e.g. rubber caps and Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or Use a soft cloth soaked in water and guards) have not been removed or slightly damp cloth, without exerting too detergent for washing vehicles. damaged. much pressure. Note: Remove any liquid or grease stains using Never use aromatic substances (e.g. an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin cleaning the plastic lenses of the cloth dampened with water and mild headlights. soap. If the stain persists, use specific products and observe the instructions When cleaning with a pressure carefully. washer, keep the pressure washer at Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that least eight inches (20 cm) away from the the cleaning products used contain no headlights. alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities. Plastic And Coated Parts Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made from microfiber), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent.

255 To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance and color of the components. Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with water. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may leave residues. Genuine Leather Parts Use only water and mild soap to clean these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Carbon Fiber Parts To eliminate small scratches and marks on the carbon, contact your authorized dealer. An improperly performed operation may irreparably damage the carbon.

256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 258 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 259 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 260 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 261 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 262 with data, tables, and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 263 STEERING ...... 264 DIMENSIONS...... 265 WEIGHTS ...... 267 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 268 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 270 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 271 PERFORMANCE ...... 273

257 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also stamped on the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) chassis near the front left shock Plate Vehicle Identification Number absorber and can be seen by opening the The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) engine compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard trim, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield. Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. 10016V0002EM Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA Vehicle Identification Number and Canada only). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10016V0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

258 ENGINE

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 280 HP Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84/90 Total displacement (cm³) 1995 Compression ratio 10:1 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280 Maximum power (kW) 206 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306 Maximum torque (Nm) 400 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3300 - 4400 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%.

259 POWER SUPPLY

Power supply 2.0L T4 MAir engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

260 TRANSMISSION

Version Transmission Traction 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse Rear-Wheel Drive

261 BRAKES

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

262 SUSPENSION

Version Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension

263 STEERING

Version Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.0L T4 MAir Engine 38.55 ft (11.75 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

264 DIMENSIONS Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

10106V0001EM

H A C D E I B F G Overall Front Rear Overall Overall Overall Width Wheelbase Front Track Rear Track Width (Incl Overhang Overhang Length Height (Excl Mirrors) Mirrors) 33.9 inches 111 inches 39.7 inches 184.6 inches 66 inches 63.5 inches 65 inches 85.2 inches 74.9 inches (862 mm) (2818 mm) (1008 mm) (4688 mm) (1677 mm) (1612 mm) (1650 mm) (2163 mm) (1903 mm) Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

265 Luggage Compartment Volume Capacity (VDA standards) Rear seats not folded Vehicle unladen: 18.54 cubic feet (525 liters) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

266 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.0L T4 MAir Engine AWD 2.0L T4 MAir Engine RWD Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled 3992 3885 to 90% and without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 992 992 Maximum permitted loads (**) 242 242 Front axle 2491 2403 Rear axle 2976 2932 Total 5247 5115 Towable loads - - Braked trailer 3000 lbs (1360 kg) 3000 lbs (1360 kg) Unbraked trailer 1000 lbs (454 kg) 1000 lbs (454 kg) Maximum load on roof 165 lbs (75 kg) 165 lbs (75 kg) Maximum load on tow hitch (braked trailer) 300 lbs (136 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

267 FUEL REQUIREMENTS to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Reformulated gasoline contains Modifications that allow the engine to This engine is designed oxygenates and are specifically blended run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or to meet all emission to reduce vehicle emissions and improve Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage regulations, and air quality. provide satisfactory to the engine, emissions, and fuel system fuel economy and The use of reformulated gasoline is components. Problems that result from performance when recommended. Properly blended running CNG or LP are not the using high-quality reformulated gasoline will provide responsibility of the manufacturer and unleaded “Regular” improved performance and durability of may void or not be covered under the gasoline having a posted octane number engine and fuel system components. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends MMT In Gasoline 2 method. For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese gasoline is recommended in these gasoline with oxygenates such as Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- engines. ethanol. containing metallic additive that is While operating on gasoline with the blended into some gasoline to increase required octane number, hearing a light Caution! octane. Gasoline blended with MMT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS knocking sound from the engine is not a provides no performance advantage cause for concern. However, if the engine beyond gasoline of the same octane is heard making a heavy knocking sound, DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing number without MMT. Gasoline blended methanol, or gasoline containing more than with MMT reduces spark plug life and see your authorized dealer immediately. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends Use of gasoline with a lower than reduces emissions system performance may result in starting and drivability in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommended octane number can cause problems, damage critical fuel system engine failure and may void or not be components, cause emissions to exceed the recommends that gasoline without MMT covered by the New Vehicle Limited applicable standard, and/or cause the be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Warranty. Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask Poor quality gasoline can cause problems Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains your gasoline retailer whether the such as hard starting, stalling, and greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). gasoline contains MMT. MMT is hesitations. If you experience these prohibited in Federal and California symptoms, try another brand of gasoline reformulated gasoline. before considering service for the Problems that result from using gasoline vehicle. containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Materials Added To Fuel or gasoline containing methanol are not Reformulated Gasoline the responsibility of the manufacturer Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that Many areas of the country require the and may void or not be covered under contain detergents, corrosion and use of cleaner burning gasoline referred New Vehicle Limited Warranty. stability additives are recommended. 268 Using gasolines that have these additives Fuel System Cautions Note: Intentional tampering with the will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions control system can result in emissions, and maintain vehicle civil penalties being assessed against Caution! performance. you. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Follow these guidelines to maintain your contains a higher level vehicle’s performance: of detergents to The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited further aide in by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can minimizing engine and impair engine performance and damage the fuel system deposits. emissions control system. When available, the usage of TOP TIER An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or Detergent gasoline is recommended. ignition malfunctions can cause the Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of catalytic converter to overheat. If you TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or Indiscriminate use of fuel system malfunctioning and may require immediate cleaning agents should be avoided. Many service. Contact an authorized dealer for of these materials intended for gum and service assistance. varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can The use of fuel additives, which are now harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products materials. contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

269 FLUID CAPACITIES

2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters Engine cooling system 2.3 Gallons 8.8 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.25 Liters Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.3 Liters RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

270 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and durability. Engine Lubrication

Engine Features Specification Replacement interval Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil CAUTION! FCA Material Standards 2.0 T4 MAir According To Maintenance Plan Using lubricants that do not MS-13340 meet the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil specifications can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

271 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 – Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Differential RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU SAE 75W-85 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA9 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD / Lubricants and greases 2.0 T4 MAir engine SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic FPW9.55550–DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case lubricant SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA11 AWD System transfer case Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes Mix a minimum solution of 50% CUNA NC956–16 Engine coolant MS.90032 engine coolant. Not mixable with ASTMD3306 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS different formulation products.(*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems. HVAC R1234yf – – (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

Caution!

The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the warranty.

272 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from 0-60 mph / (0-100 km/h) Engine Top speed mph / (km/h) sec. 2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP AWD Engine 144 / (232) * 5.4 * 2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP RWD Engine 144 / (232) * 5.7 * * Based on manufacturer testing.

273 This page is intentionally left blank

274 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .276 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 276 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....277 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .278 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .278

275 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Owner's telephone number (home and office) SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your Authorized dealer name satisfaction. We want you to be happy Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an be performed may not be covered by the authorized dealer. We strongly Alfa Romeo Customer Center warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to P.O.Box 21–8004 the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your log of your vehicle's service history, as vehicle the best, and are most concerned Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized (1-844-253-2872) dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada) CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O.Box 1621 correctly and in a timely manner. problems or the specific work you want Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 This is why you should always talk to an done. If you've had an accident or work Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. Customer Assistance For The Hearing Be Reasonable With Requests Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) If for some reason you are still not If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or To assist customers who have hearing have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They difficulties, the manufacturer has discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. installed special TDD advisor and list the items in order of (Telecommunication Devices for the If an authorized dealer is unable to priority. At many authorized dealers, you Deaf) equipment at its customer center. resolve the concern, you may contact the may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's customer center. daily charge. If you need a rental, it is customer, who has access to a TDD or a advisable to make these arrangements Any communication to the conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the when you call for an appointment. manufacturer's customer center should United States, can communicate with the include the following information: manufacturer by dialing Owner's name and address 1-800-380-2479.

276 Canadian residents with hearing Limited Warranty expires, please refer to WARRANTY INFORMATION difficulties that require assistance can the contract documents, and contact the use the special needs relay service person listed in those documents. See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and provisions of FCA US offered by Bell Canada. For TTY We appreciate that you have made a teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties major investment when you purchased applicable to this vehicle and market. Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also connect with a Bell Relay Service made a major investment in facilities, operator. tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. Youwill be pleased with their Youmay have purchased a service sincere efforts to resolve any warranty contract for a vehicle to help protect you issues or related concerns. from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Warning! manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines purchased a manufacturer's service only), some of its constituents, and certain contract, you will receive Plan Provisions vehicle components contain, or emit, and an Owner Identification Card in the chemicals known to the State of California mail within three weeks of the vehicle to cause cancer and birth defects, or other delivery date. If you have any questions reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids about the service contract, call the contained in vehicles and certain products of manufacturer's Service Contract component wear contain, or emit, chemicals National Customer Hotline at known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, reproductive harm. call (877) 230-0563 English / (877) 515-9112 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle 277 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS In The 50 United States And If you believe that your vehicle has a To order the following manuals, you may Washington, D.C. safety defect, you should contact the use either the website or the phone Customer Service Department numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, If you believe that your vehicle has a American Express, and Discover orders defect that could cause a crash or immediately. Canadian customers are accepted. cause injury or death, you should who wish to report a safety defect to Service Manuals immediately inform the National the Canadian government should These comprehensive Service Manuals Highway Traffic Safety contact Transport Canada, Motor provide the information that students Administration (NHTSA) in addition Vehicle Defect Investigations and and professional technicians need in to notifying FCA US LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ . solving, maintaining, servicing, and If NHTSA receives similar repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complaints, it may open an complete working knowledge of the CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a vehicle, system, and/or components is safety defect exists in a group of written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. vehicles, it may order a recall and Diagnostic Procedure Manuals remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled cannot become involved in individual with diagrams, charts and detailed problems between you, your illustrations. These practical manuals authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. make it easy for students and technicians To contact NHTSA, you may call the to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at features. They show exactly how to find 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: and correct problems the first time, using 1-800-424-9153); or go to step-by-step troubleshooting and http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: drivability procedures, proven diagnostic Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Owner's Manuals Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan These Owner's Manuals have been also obtain other information about prepared with the assistance of service motor vehicle safety from and engineering specialists to acquaint http://www.safercar.gov . you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. 278 Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com

279 This page is intentionally left blank

280 INDEX Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....159 Certification Label ...... 183 Accessories Purchased By The Alfa DNA System...... 156 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 234 Owner...... 4 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System . . .100 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 236 Active Safety Systems ...... 100 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 270 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Automatic Climate Controls ...... 47 Indicator Light) ...... 96 (Cruise Control) ...... 164 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 36 Checking Levels ...... 224 Off...... 165 Automatic Headlights ...... 37 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .139 On...... 165 Automatic Temperature Control Checks, Safety ...... 139 Additives, Fuel ...... 268 (ATC)...... 47 Child Restraint ...... 129 AFS Function ...... 38 Automatic Transmission ...... 150 Child Restraints AirBag...... 120 Auxiliary Driving Systems...... 104 Booster Seats ...... 131 Air Bag Operation ...... 122 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 64 Child Seat Installation ...... 137 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 119 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 122 B-Pillar Location ...... 240 Belt ...... 135 Enhanced Accident Battery ...... 226 Infant And Child Restraints .....130 Response ...... 125,218 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....17 LATCH Positions ...... 132 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....218 Battery Recharging ...... 227 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ...... 132 Front Air Bag ...... 120 Belts, Seat ...... 139 If Deployment Occurs ...... 125 Older Children And Child Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 104 Restraints ...... 131 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 122 Bodywork (Cleaning And Seating Positions ...... 132 Maintaining YourAir Bag System .128 Maintenance) ...... 254 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 268 Maintenance ...... 128 Brakes ...... 262 Cleaning Redundant Air Bag Warning Brake Fluid Level ...... 226 Wheels ...... 249 Light ...... 120 Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 43 Climate Control...... 45 Side Air Bags ...... 122 Bulbs, Light ...... 140 Automatic ...... 47 Transporting Pets ...... 138 Compact Spare Tire ...... 248 Air Bag Light...... 119,139 Camera, Rear ...... 179 Contract, Service...... 277 Air Pressure Capacities, Fluid ...... 270 Cooling System Tires ...... 243 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 139 Cooling Capacity ...... 270 Selection Of Coolant Emergency Flashers (Antifreeze) ...... 270 In Case Of ...... 209,234 Hazard Warning ...... 194 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Emergency, In Case Of Turn Signals ...... 40,140

INDEX Replacement) ...... 198 Jump Starting ...... 212 Fluid Capacities...... 270 Cruise Control (Speed Control) .162,164 Overheating ...... 214 Fluid Leaks ...... 141 Cupholder ...... 66 Towing...... 217 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 271 Cupholders ...... 66 Emission Control System Forward Collision Warning ...... 107 Customer Assistance ...... 276 Maintenance...... 96 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Engine ...... 259 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights Daytime Running Lights...... 37 Block Heater ...... 147 (Bulb Replacement)...... 197 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...... 37 Engine Coolant Level ...... 225 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 30 Defroster, Windshield ...... 140 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 139 Front Seats (Power Adjustment) ....28 Dimensions ...... 265 Fuel Requirements ...... 268 Fuel Direction Indicators (Changing A Oil...... 270 Additives ...... 268 Bulb)...... 197 Oil Selection ...... 270 Clean Air ...... 268 Disabled VehicleTowing...... 215 Overheating ...... 214 Ethanol ...... 268 Door Light ...... 41 Starting ...... 214 Materials Added ...... 268 Door Locks ...... 26 Engine Compartment ...... 224 Methanol ...... 268 Doors...... 23 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .255 Tank Capacity ...... 270 Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .100 Engine Oil Fuse Boxes ...... 201 Driving Modes ...... 157 Level Check ...... 225 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 199 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Engine Overheating ...... 214 System ...... 103 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....62 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...... 125,218 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 268 Electric Park Brake...... 148 Ethanol ...... 268 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 268 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 36 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 139 General Information ...... 106,111 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Glove Compartment ...... 61 Control) ...... 162 Exhaust System ...... 139 Glove Compartment Light ...... 41 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Exterior Lighting ...... 37,39 System ...... 101 Exterior Lights ...... 37,140 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Replacement) ...... 198 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 185 Installing Electrical/Electronic Types Of Bulbs ...... 195 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 184 Devices...... 4 Light Switch...... 37 GVWR...... 183 Instrument Cluster...... 68 Lights...... 140 Display ...... 70 AirBag...... 119,139 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 194 Instrument Panel Automatic Headlights ...... 37 Features ...... 68 Head Restraints ...... 32 Courtesy/Reading ...... 40,41,42 Interior Ambient Lighting ...... 41 Head Rests ...... 32 Daytime Running ...... 37 Interior Lights...... 40 Headlights Exterior...... 140 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 255 Switch ...... 37,39 Headlight Switch ...... 37,39 Internal Equipment ...... 61 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 255 Headlights ...... 37,39 Heated Mirrors ...... 37 High Beam ...... 39 Jack Operation ...... 234 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 35 Instrument Cluster ...... 37,39 Jump Starting ...... 212 Heater, Engine Block...... 147 Intensity Control ...... 43 High Beam Headlights...... 39 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 24 Interior ...... 41,42 Automatic High Beam Map...... 40 Headlights ...... 39 Passive Entry ...... 24 Park...... 38 Hill Decent Control (HDC) System. . .103 Keys...... 16 Reading ...... 40 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System .....102 Lane Change ...... 40 Turn Signals ...... 40,140 Hitches Loading Vehicle ...... 183 TrailerTowing ...... 185 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 40 Tires ...... 240 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ....62 Lane Departure Warning System . . .176 Locks Hood ...... 55 LaneSense...... 176 Child Protection ...... 27 Closing ...... 55 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 115 Latches...... 141 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Opening ...... 55 Replacement) ...... 198 Leaks, Fluid ...... 141 Life Of Tires ...... 247 Identification Data ...... 258 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Ignition...... 19 Liftgate ...... 56 Engine) ...... 96 Switch ...... 19 Lifting The Vehicle ...... 234 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 20 Light Bulbs...... 140 Manual Placard, Tire And Loading Remote Starting System ...... 144 Service ...... 278 Information ...... 240 Replacement Tires ...... 247 Methanol...... 268 Power Replacing A Bulb ...... 194

INDEX Mirrors ...... 36 Mirrors...... 36 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 197 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Automatic Dimming ...... 36 Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 198 Outlet) ...... 64 Electric Powered ...... 36 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 278 Seats ...... 28 Electric Remote ...... 36 Restraints, Child ...... 129 Sunroof ...... 54 Heated ...... 37 Restraints, Head ...... 32 Power Sunroof ...... 54 Rims And Tires ...... 235 Power Supply ...... 260 OBD System ...... 96 Roll Over Warning ...... 3 Occupant Restraints...... 114 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .118 Pretensioners Oil, Engine Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 139 Seat Belts ...... 118 Capacity ...... 270 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....140 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 253 Recommendation ...... 270 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 278 Viscosity ...... 270 Radial Ply Tires ...... 246 Safety Information, Tire...... 235 Operator Manual Safety Tips ...... 139 Owner's Manual ...... 278 Radio Frequency General Information ...... 18,20,26 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 139 Outlet Saving Fuel ...... 191 Power...... 64 Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ...... 4 Scheduled Servicing ...... 220 Overheating, Engine ...... 214 Rear Armrest ...... 66 Scheduled Servicing Program Rear Camera ...... 179 (2.0L T4 MAir Engine Versions). . .221 Paintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance) ...... 254 Rear Cross Path ...... 104 Seat Belts ...... 114,139 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .102 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 45 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 117 Park Assist ...... 171 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 268 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 117 ParkSense System ...... 171 Refueling Procedure ...... 181 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Refueling The Vehicle ...... 181 Passive Entry ...... 24 Anchorage ...... 117 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 115 Performance (Top Speed)...... 273 Child Restraints ...... 129 Pets...... 138 Remote Keyless Entry...... 16 Energy Management Feature . . . .118 Speed Control Telescoping Steering Column ...... 34 Front Seat ...... 114,115 Accel/Decel ...... 163 Tilt Steering Column...... 34 Inspection ...... 139 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 166 Tire And Loading Information Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .117 Cancel ...... 164,169 Placard ...... 240 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 115 Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .168 Tire Markings ...... 235 Pregnant Women ...... 118 Resume ...... 164 Tire Safety Information ...... 235 Pretensioners ...... 118 Set...... 163 Tire Service Kit ...... 209 Rear Seat ...... 115 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .162 Tires ...... 140,243,248,252 Reminder ...... 115 Speed Limiter...... 161 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 247 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 118 Starting ...... 214 Air Pressure ...... 243 Untwisting Procedure ...... 117 Button ...... 19 Changing ...... 209 Seats ...... 28 Cold Weather ...... 145 Compact Spare ...... 248 Head Restraints ...... 32 Starting And Operating ...... 214 General Information ...... 243,248 Height Adjustment ...... 28 Starting Procedures ...... 214 High Speed ...... 244 Power...... 28 Starting The Engine ...... 144 Inflation Pressure ...... 243 Tilting ...... 28 Steering ...... 264 Jacking ...... 234 Security Alarm ...... 21 Wheel Locking ...... 20 Life Of Tires ...... 247 Service Assistance...... 276 Wheel, Heated ...... 35 Load Capacity ...... 240 Service Contract ...... 277 Wheel, Tilt ...... 34 Quality Grading ...... 252 Service Manuals ...... 278 Steering Wheel ...... 34 Radial ...... 246 Servicing Procedures ...... 228 Stop/Start System...... 159 Replacement ...... 247 Shoulder Belts ...... 115 Suggestions For Driving...... 191 Safety ...... 235,243 Signals, Turn...... 40,140 Sun Roof...... 54 Sizes ...... 236 Snow Chains...... 250 Sun Visors ...... 61 Snow Tires ...... 250 Snow Tires...... 250 Supplemental Restraint System – Spare Tires ...... 248 AirBag...... 120 Spare Tires ...... 248 Spinning ...... 246 Suspension ...... 263 Trailer Towing ...... 188 Symbols ...... 7 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 246 TongueWeight/Trailer Weight .....187 Uconnect Settings Windows (Cleaning) ...... 255 Towing...... 184,186 Customer Programmable Windshield Defroster ...... 140 Disabled Vehicle ...... 215 Features ...... 24 Windshield Wiper ...... 43 INDEX Towing Eyes ...... 217 Passive Entry Programming .....24 Replacing Blades ...... 231 TowingThe Vehicle ...... 217 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 252 Windshield Wipers ...... 43 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .117 System)...... 111 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 6 Traction Control System (TCS).....101 TrailerTowing ...... 184 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 4 Cooling System Tips ...... 189 Vehicle Identification Number .....258 Hitches ...... 185 Vehicle Loading ...... 183,240 Minimum Requirements ...... 187 Vent Operation ...... 45 Tips...... 189 Warnings, Roll Over ...... 3 Trailer And TongueWeight .....187 Warranty Information ...... 277 Trailer And TongueWeight .....186 Washer Fluid For Wiring ...... 188 Windshield/Headlights...... 226 TrailerTowing Guide ...... 186 Washers, Windshield...... 43 Trailer Weight ...... 186 Weights ...... 267 Transmission ...... 261 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 249 Transporting Pets ...... 138 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 249 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 246 Wheels And Tires ...... 235 Turn Signals ...... 40

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING normal may require special precautions. EQUIPMENT All installations should be checked for possible interfer- Special design considerations are incorporated into this ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio vehicle’s electronic systems. frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Operating, servicing and maintaining a The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the phthalates, and lead, which are known to roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to your vehicle. For more information go to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. OWNER’S MANUAL 2019 OWNER’S

2019 STELVIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GU-126-AB ROMEO STELVIO ALFA Second Edition Manual Owner’s